Buick 1996 LeSabre Owner's Manual

BUICK
The 1996 Buick LeSabre Owner’s Mmual
.............................................................
This section tells you howto use your seats and safety belts properly.It also explains “SRS” system.
FeaturesandControls ..................................................................
This section explains how to start and operate your Buick.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems .....................................................
Seats and Restraint Systems
1-1
2-1
3-1
This section tells you how to adjustthe ventilation and comfort controls and how tooperate your
audio system.
..............................................................
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
ProblemsontheRoad ..................................................................
YourDrivingandtheRoad
4-1
5-1
This section tells you what todo if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or
overheated engine, etc.
ServiceandAppearanceCare ............................................................
6-1
Here the manual tells you how tokeep your Buick running properly and looking good.
..................................................................
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and whatfluids and lubricants to use.
Customer Assistance Information ........................................................
Maintenanceschedule
7-1
8-1
This section tells you how to contact Buickfor assistance and how to get service publications. Italso
gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8-7.
Index
................................................................................
9-1
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something
you want to read.
i
~~~~
We support voluntary
technician certification.
m
u
”
GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,
BUICK, the BUICK Emblem and the nameLeSabre are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latestinformation at thetime it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” forBuick Motor
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your Buick; SO it will be there
if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell
the vehicle,please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franqais chez
votre concessionaire ou aur
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25639452 A First Edition
ii
@Copyright GeneralMotors Corporation 1995
All Rights Reserved
111
“valve-in-head” engine, a light, powerful and reliable
engine which would eventually influence the entire
automotive industry.
William C. Durant was instrumental in promoting
Buicks across the country using his Durant-Dort
Carriage Co. outlets and salespeople as the nucleus of a
giant distribution system. He knew the Buick as a
“self-seller.” If automobiles could be this good, he
thought, maybe it was time to switch from the horse and
buggy business to automobiles.
At the 1905 New York
Auto Show, Durant took
orders for 1,000 Buicks
before the company had
built 40. On Buick’s
success, Durant created a
holding company,
September 16, 1908. He
called it General Motors.
Walter Marrand Thomas Buick
Buick’s chief engineer, Walter L. Marr (left), and
Thomas D. Buick, son of founder David Dunbar Buick,
drove the first Flint Buick in a successful Flint-Detroit
round trip in July 1904.
David Buick was building gasoline engines by 1899,
and M m ,his engineer, apparently built the first auto to
be called a Buick in 1900. However, Buick traditionally
dates its beginnings to. 1903. That was the year the
company was reorganized, refinanced and moved from
Detroit to Flint. Buick has always been a product
innovator. Buick engineers developed the
iv
William C . (Billy)Durant
Durant also created a racingteam that won 500 racing
trophies in 1909 and 19 10, including successes
at
Indianapolis two years before the Indy 500 began.
The success of Buick engines was visible not only on
the race track,but in endurance tests across the country
and around the world. Buick was the only car to
complete a 1,000-mile Chicago-to-New York race in
1906. And a Buick was the first car totravel across
South America, driven from Buenos Aires, Argentina,
over the Andes to Santiago, Chilein 1914.
I
1
Buick drew plenty of attention because it could climb
hills and run through mud like no othercar. Buick’s
endurance and reliability were world famous.
During World WarI, Buick built Liberty aircraft engines
as well as Red Cross ambulances so successfully that
one Buick ambulance was awarded the Croix de Guerre
by the French government.
As a builder of premier automobiles, Buick was hard hit
by the Great Depression.However, new General
Manager Harlow H. Curtice created popular new models
including the Special and the Roadmaster. Buick sales
soon flourished.
. .. .
.
.
.
1911 Model 21 Touring Car on Buick’s Test Hill
First Buick Factory
V
In World War 11, Buick built aircraft engines, tanks and
other military hardware. This post-war period brought
great styling and engineering changes which resulted in
increased sales.
The torque converter automatic
transmission, Dynaflow, was introduced in the 1948
Roadmaster. Buick’s famous “portholes” came along
in 1949.
A high-compression V-8engine was introduced in 1953.
And Buick’s famous vertical pillar “toothy” grille,
(introduced in 1942),became more massive in the
post-war era.
1953 Skylark
1949 Roadmaster
vi
Motor Trend magazine named the 1962 Buick Special
“Car of the Year.” The first production V-6 engine was
used in the Special.
1962 Buick Special
Ed Mertz, General Manager, Buick Motor Division
Built inside the walls of the old buildings in Buick’s
former Flint complex,which formed the cornerstoneof
General Motors, Buick City is a state-of-the-art
assembly facility with more than 200 robots and other
high-tech equipment. It was completed in the fall
of 1985.
Our mission is simple:
Buicks are, and will continue to be, premium American
motorcars with smooth power, high performance, rich
detail and comfortable accommodation.
“Buick will provide Premium American Motorcars
backed with services that exceed our customers’
expectations, throughoutthe purchase, ownership,
service and repurchase experience.”
Buicks are SUBSTANTIAL.
Buicks are DISTINCTIVE.
Buicks are POWERFUL.
Buicks are MATURE.
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls foryour vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index
in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of
all that’s in the manual, and the page number where
you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find anumber of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
viii
r--
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
1 NOTICE:
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warningsin different colors or in
different words.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
You’ll also cee warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words CAUTION or NOTICE.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
iX
‘
hide mbols
‘1hese are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
~
For example.
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
COOLANT
TEMP
DOOR LOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
These symbols
have to do with
your lights:
9
TURN
SIGNALS
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
1 7
FUSE
LIGHTER
(0) b
HORN
BRAKE
BURNS
SPEAKER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
,111,
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
.‘**o*o
‘7
$0
.*’
VENTILATING
FAN
t
n
r!,
(
d
A
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE W
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
(@)
b
FUEL
b
e3
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in
your
Buick and how to use your safety beltsproperly. You
can also learn about some things you should not do with
air bags and safety belts.
Manual Front Seat
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to
adjust them -- and also about reclining seatbacksand
head restraints.
You can lose controlof the vehicleif you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confme you, or makeyou push a pedal when you
don’t wantto. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Pull up on the control bar under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seatto where you want it. Then
release the bar and try to move the seat with your body,
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Power Seat (Option)
Rear Control:Raise the rear of the seat by pushing the
switch on the left. Lower the rear of the seat by pushing
the switch on the right.
leclininp Front Se--backs
The power seat controls are on the armrest.
Front Control:Raise the front of the seat by pushing
the left side of the switch. Push the right side of the
switch to lower the front of the seat.
Center Control:Move the seat forward or backward by
pushing the controlon the front orback. Raise the seat
by pushing the control on the left. Lower the seat by
pushing the control on the right.
1-2
~
....
To adjust the seatback, liftthe lever on the outer side of
the seat and move the seatback to where you want it.
Release the lever to lock the seatback. Pull up on the
lever and the seat will go to an upright position.
But don’t have a seatback
reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, itwill be in
front of you. In a crashyou could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
a crash
the
The lap belt can’t do its job either.
In
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
at your pelvic bones.
forces would be there, not
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well
back in the seat and wear your safetybelt properly.
Head Restraints
Slide thehead restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. Thisposition
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-3
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as areminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), or airbag system.
Don’t let anyone ride where
he or shecan’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash,you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash.If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Saft
w
l
Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
t
Put someone on it.
.
.
.
.*.
Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit's just a seat
on wheels.
1-5
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-6
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop.You stop overmore distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-7
Here Are Questions Many People Ask &:
About, Safety Belts-- and the Answers
A:
&: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
i
1 A:
1
I
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But
you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
@
If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. Butthey are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for salehas required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially inside and other collisions.
If I’m a good driver,and I never drivefar from
home, why shouldI wear safety belts?
You may be an excellentdriver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’tyour fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being agood driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, suchas bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest numberof serious
injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people
of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for
smaller children and babies.If a child will beriding in
your Buick, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to
know which restraint systemsyour
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint
system.
Lap-shoulder Belt
3. Pick up the latch plate,
and pull thebelt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The driverhas a lap-shoulder belt.Here’s how IO wear
it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1. Close and lock thedoor.
2. Adjust the seat (to seehow, see “Seats”in the Index)
so you can situp straight.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure. If
the belt isn’tlong enough, see“Safety Belt
Extender” at the end
of this section.
Make sure the release.button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety beltquickly if‘ you ever had to.
1-9
The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less llkely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop orcrash.
Before you begin to drive,move the shoulder belt
adjuster tothe height that is right for you.
To move it down, squeeze the release handleand move
the height adjuster to thedesired position. You can move
the adjuster up justby pushing up on the bottom of the
release handle. After you move the adjuster towhere
you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release handleto make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not fallingoff
your shoulder.
1-11
e.'
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyhurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-12
Q:
-I&,,
CAUTIO
What’s wrong with this?
\-
A
You can be seriously injuredif your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at thepelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries.Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
t
A:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-13
What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
._._
.
. ..
You can be seriously injuredif you wear the
a crash, your
shoulder belt under your arm. In
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-14
What’s wrongwith this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spreadimpact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
1
A:
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-15
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) or air bag system.
Your Buick has two air bags -- one air bag for the driver
and another airbag for the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
I
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
--
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
1-16
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have an airbag. Wearing your safety belt during
a crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside thevehicle or being ejected fromit. The air
bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” That is, it
works with safety belts but
doesn’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION- Qmtinued)
Air-bagsare designed to work onlyin moderate to
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. Theyaren’t designed to inflateat all in
rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontd crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle, including the driver, i
should weara safety beltproperly whether or
not there’san air bag for that person.
4
.
properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see the part
of this manual called “Children” and the caution
label onthe right front passenger’s safety belt.
--
A CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster thanthe
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position.for an airbag inflation
in a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with an air bag. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while stillmaintaining control
of the vehicle. An inflating air bag can seriously
injure small children. Always secure children
CAUTION: (Continued)
AIR BAG
Gage Cluster
AIR
BAG
Standard Cluster
on the instrument
There isan air bag readiness light
panel, which skiowsAIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you
if there isan .electrical
problem. See“Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-17
HQ th \ir Bag System Works
The right front passenger's air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.
Where is the air bag?
The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-18
~
~
1
Don’t put anything on, or attach anything to, the
steering wheel orinstrument panel. Also, don’t
put anything (such as pets or objects) between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. If something is between an
occupant and an air bag, it could affect the
performance of the air bag or worse, it could
cause injury.
--
When should an air bag inflate?
The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The airbag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform,the threshold level
is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as aparked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The airbag is not designed to,inflate in rollovers,
side impacts or rear impacts,
because inflation would
not help the occupant.
In any particular crash,no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to avehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angleof the impact and
the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one
indication of this.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In a frontal ornear-frontal impact of sufficient severity,
the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is
suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. The sensing
system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide
sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen
gas, which inflates the air bag.The inflator, air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
packed inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
1-19
1
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor
the instrument panel. The air bag supplements the
protection provided by safety belts.Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. But
air bags would nothelp you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’smotion is not toward the
air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
L
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
0
The air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you’llneed some new parts for your air
bag system. If you don’t getthem, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
0
Your vehicle is equipped witha crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the sensorsare
activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates. This occurs
so quickly that some people may not even realize the air
bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module in
the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, orthe
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, will
be hot for a short time. Thepart of the bag that comes
into contact with you maybe warm, but it will never be
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor will it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
1-20
When an air bag inflates, thereis dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle afteran air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a windowor door.
0
Let only qualified technicians work on your air
bag system. Improper service canmean that your
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the cover for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, they may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag.
Do not open or
break the air bag covers.
Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedBuick
Air bags affect how your Buick should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate whilesomeone is working on your vehicle.
Your Buick dealer and the LeSabre Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag
system. To purchase a service manual, see “Serviceand
Owner Publications” in the Index.
A CAUTION:
For up to10 seconds after the ignitionkey is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper
service. You
can be injuredif you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped withyellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part
of
the air bag system.Be sure tofollow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work foryou is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetusis to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’smore
likely that the fetuswon’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the
key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right frontpassenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position,”
earlier in thissection.
When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it goback all the way and
start again.
If your vehicle has a center passenger position, be sure
to use the correctbuckle when buckling your
lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate
will not
go fully into thebuckle, see if you are using the buckle
for the center passenger position.
npregnant woman should wew a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lapportion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If YQWvehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in thecenter.positions.
When you sit in a center seating position,
you have' a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plateand pull it along the belt.
1-23
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions.
To make thebelt shorter, pull its .free end
as shown until
the beltis -snug.
.-
Buckle, position and release it thesame way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enoug?;,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the
end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if youever had to.
U
431.
er Belt
The positions nextto the windows have lap-’shoulder
_.
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
If the beltstops.before itreaches the buckle, tilt the latch
plate and keep pulling untilyou can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
is secure.
it
’
1. Pick up the latchplate and pull the belt acrossyou.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure
the
release buttonon the buckle ispositioned so you-would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever
had to.
1-25
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely
to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restrainingforces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, justpush the button on the buckle.
1-27
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for smalladults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pullsthe belt away
from the neck and head.
There is oneguide for each outsidepassenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Slide the guide under and past thebelt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-28
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elasticcord must be under the belt
and the guide
on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses theshoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, just
perform
these stepsin reverse order. Squeeze the belt edges
together so that you can take them out from theguides.
Pull the guideupward ‘toexpose its storage clip,and
then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide
and
clip inward and inbetween the seatbackand the interior
body, leaving only the loopof elastic cord exposed.
1-29
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says childrenup to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
1-30
Smaller Children and Babies
*/A CAUTION:
:
y
3;
.,
.L' .-,-+.
-'*- 4
'
,
;
,
I
'
.A.
LYiA-.
-, I;Ub' .?y*
4
:57=-%...dA*fl
r
p
--:-.
-
Smaller children and babies should always
be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint
will say whether it is
the right type andsize for your child. A very
young child's hip bonesare so small thata
regular belt might not stay
low on thehips, as it
should. Instead, the beltwill likely be over the
child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force righton the child's abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries,So, be sure that
any child small enoughfor one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
._
_ -
. .
CAUTION: (Co .hued)
1
,
.
at only 25mph (40 ludh), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
I
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weighmuch until .a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t holdit. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-31
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat.Never- put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passengerseat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be
i seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the backof a
rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to
the inflatingair bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You may, however, secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat. Before
you secure
a forward-facing child restraint, alwaysmove the
front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. Or,
secure the child restraint in the rear seat.
~
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured by the right front passenger
air bagif it inflates. Never securea child restraint
in the center front seat. It’s always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may,
however, secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, but
only with
the seat moved all the way back.
Wherever you install it, be sure to securethe child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision orsudden stop and injure peoplein
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
If your child restraint has a top strap,it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Buick dealer to put it in foryou. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell
you how to do it.
For cars first sold in Canada, child restraints with a top
strap must be anchored according to Canadian law.
Your dealer can obtain the hardware kit and install it for
you, or you mayinstall ityourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.
Use the tether hardware kit available from the dealer.
The hardware and installation instructions were
specifically designed for this vehicle.
3. Pick up the latchplate, and run the lapand shoulder
portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
'
You'll be using the lap-shoulderbelt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust belt
the if needed.
2. Secure-thechild in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or
neck, put itbehind the-child restraint.
1-34
4. Buckle thebelt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pullup on the shoulder belt while
you push down on. the child restraint.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions tobe sure itis secure.
To remove the child restraint, justunbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let go
it back all theway. The safetybelt
will move freelyagain and beready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraintin the Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injuredby the right front passenger
air bagif it inflates. Never securea child restraint
in the center front seat.It’s always betterto
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may,
however, secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, but
only with
the seat moved all the way back.
See the earlier part about the top strapif the child
restraint has one.
1-36
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions tobe sure it is secure. If it isn’t, securethe
restraint in a different placein the vehicleand
contact the child restraint maker for their advice
about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, justunbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the releasebutton is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Securing a Child Restraintin the Right
Front Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facingchild restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
seriously injuredif the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back aof
rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to
the inflatingair bag. Always securea rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
1-38
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
5. Buckle the belt.Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
6 . mXl the restof the lapbelt all theway out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-39
7. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
~~
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children aresafer if they
are restrainedin the rear seat.But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one personat a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraintthat belts provide. If the
child is sittingin a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index. If
the child is so small that the shoulderbelt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck,you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lapbelt.
1
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that hasa
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part
is behind
in this way, in
the child. If the child wears the belt
a crash thechild might slide under the belt. The
belt's force would then be applied right on the
child's abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-42
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten,your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
you will wear, so the
in to order it, take the heaviest coat
extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will
be just foryou, and just for the seatin your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit.
To wear it, just attach it
to the regularsafety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make surethe safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job,have it repaired.
Replacing, Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, doyou need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, thenyou need new belts.
If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them.Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat partsrepaired or replaced.New parts and repairs
may be necessaryeven if the belt wasn’t being used at
the timeof the collision.
If your seat adjusterwon’t work after a crash, the special
part of the safety belt thatgoes through the seat tothe
adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
tom or frayed, geta new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-43
NOTES
1-44
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and
optional featureson your Buick, and information on
starting, shiftingand braking. Also explained are the
instrument paneland the warning systems that tell you
if everything isworking properly -- and what to do if
you have a problem.
Keys
Leaving young children ina vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.A child
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-1
The ignition keys are
for theignition only.
When a new LeSabre is delivered, the dealer removes
the plugs from the keys, and gives them to the first
owner. However, the ignition key may not have a plug.
If the ignition key doesn’t have a plug, it will have a
bar-coded key tag.
Each plug or tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or
a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
plugs or the tags in a safeplace. If you lose your keys,
you’ll be able tohave new ones made easily using these
plugs or the tag. If your ignition keys don’t have plugs
or the tag, go to your Buick dealer for the correct key
code if you need a new ignition key.
The door keys are for the
doors and all other locks.
I NOTICE:
Your Buick has a number of features that can help
prevent theft. But you can havea lot of trouble
getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys
inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle
to get in.So be sure you have extra keys.
2-2
From the outside, use your door key or Remote Keyless
Entry, if your vehicle has this option. With your door
key, turning the key toward the rear of the vehicle will
lock the door. Turning the key toward the front of the
vehicle will unlock it.
Door Locks
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors andfall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open
it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop yourvehicle.
This may notbe so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, andyou will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system and it
is activated, unlock the doors only with the key or
Remote Keyless Entry System. Thiswill avoid setting
off the alarm.
From the inside, tolock the
door, slide the lock control
on the door down. To
unlock the door, slide the
lock control up.
There are severalways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
2-3
Power Door Locks
Memory Door Locks (Option)
With power door locks, you
can lock or unlock all
the doors of your vehicle
using the driver’s or
front passenger’s door
lock switch.
The switch on each rear door works only that door’s
lock. It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors -- that’s
a safety feature.
2-4
Close your doors and turn on the ignition. Every time
you move your shift lever out of PARK (P) all of the
doors will lock. And, every time you stop and move
your shift lever into PARK (P) with the ignition turned
OFF, your doors will unlock. If someone needs to get
out while you’re not in PARK (P), have that person use
the manual or power lock. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Just use the manual
or power lock to lock the door again. If you need to lock
your doors before shifting out of PARK (P), just use the
manual or power lock button to lock the doors.
Customizing Your Memory Door Locks Feature
To change modes:
You can program thememory door locks featureto
change to the following
modes:
1
Mode
Operation
0
No automatic door lock or
unlock.
1
All doors automatically lock
when shifted outof PARK (P).
No automatic door unlock.
2
All doors automaticallylock
when shifted outof PARK (P).
Only the driver’s door
automatically unlockswhen
shifted intoPARK (P).
3
All doors automaticallylock
when shifted outof PARK (P).,
All the doors automaticallyunlock
when shifted intoPARK (P).
Vehicles are deliveredprogrammed in Mode3.
..
Close all doors and turn the ignitionon. Keep all
doors closedthroughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold the driver’spower door lock switch
through Step4.
3. Press theLOCK button on the RemoteKeyless Entry
transmitter. The automaticdoor locks will remain in
the currentmode.
4. Press the LOCK button on the transmitteraga*.
Each time the transmitter’s
LOCK button is
pressed, the mode willadvance by one, going from
3 to 0 to 1, etc.
5. Release thepower door lock switch. The
automatic door locks willremain in the most
recent mode selected.
Rear Door Security Lock
Your LeSabre is equipped
with rear door security
locks that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors of your car
from the inside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able toopen
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how these security locks work, and
how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the door
from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
To use oneof these locks:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Move the lever all the way up to the
ENGAGED position.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannotbe opened from
inside when this feature is in use. If you want to open a
rear door when the security lock is on:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
2-6
Lockout Protection
The power door locks will not workif the key is left in the
ignition with the driver’s door open.You can overridethis
feature by holding the power door lock switchfor more
than three seconds, unless the engine isrunning.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system, see
“Universal Theft-Deterrent” in the Index.
Remote Keyless Entry System
(Option)
If your Buick has this option, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the key chain transmitter suppliedwith
your vehicle.
Your Remote Keyless
Entry System operates on a
radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules.
Should interference to this system occur, try this:
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions on battery replacement.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. This product has a maximum range.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
See your Buick dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operation
I rle
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
driver‘s door will unlock when UNLOCKis pressed.
If UNLOCK is pressed again within five seconds,all
doors will unlock. Pressing the UNLOCK button will
also illuminate the interior lamps. See “Illuminated
Entry” in the Index.
All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed.
The trunk will unlock when the opened trunk symbol is
pressed when the ignition is OFF. The trunk symbol will
also work when the ignition is on, but only while in
PARK (P).
2-7
Instant Alarm
SecurityFeedback
When the button with the horn symbol on the key
transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the
headlamps and taillamps will flash for upto two
minutes. This can be turned off by pressing the instant
alarm again, unlocking the vehicle with a key or by
turning the ignitionon.
This provides feedback to the driverwhen the vehicle
receives a command from thekey transmitter. The
following modesmay be selected:
'
Mode
Security
Feedback
0
No feedback when locking or
unlocking vehicle
1
No feedback when locking;
exterior lamps flash when
unlocking vehicle
Once the transmitter
has been resynchronized, the horn
will chrrp and the exterior lampswill flash once. The
system should now operate properly.
2
Exterior larnps..flashwhen
locking; no feedback when
unlocking vehicle
Personal Choice Features
3
Exterior lamps flashwhen locking
and when unlocking vehicle
4
Exterior lamps flash and horn
chups when locking; no feedback
when unlocking vehicle
5
Exterior lamps flash and horn
chirps when locking; exterior
lamps flash when unlocking
If only the instant alarm works, thetrasmitter needs to
be resynchronizedto the receiver: Do this by pressing and
holding both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons
for about
eight seconds.You must be withinrange of the vehicle.
Each key transmitter can be programmed to the driver's
preference formemory door locks,security feedback,
delayed locking and perimeter lighting. See e,achfeawe
in the Index.
2-8
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 5 . To
change to another mode:
The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off for
each remote transmitter.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch.
2. Press theopened trunk button on the transmitter.
The transmitter will remain in its current mode.
To turn the feature on:
3. Press the opened trunk button again. Each time the
opened trunk button is pressed,the transmitter will
advance to thenext mode.
4. Release the power door lock switch.
2. Press the UNLOCK button on the remote
transmitter. The lock delay is still off and all doors
will remain locked.
Delayed Locking (Option)
Note: This featureis available onlyif you request
your dealer to activatethis option. After initial
activation, you can turn this feature on and off by
using the following procedure.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch
throughout this procedure. All the doors will lock.
3. Press the UNLOCK button on the remote
transmitter again. Lock delay is now active and all
doors will unlock.
4. Release the power door lock switch.
To turn this feature off, repeatthe previous procedure.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the Remote Keyless
Entry, use the following procedure to turn the feature on:
This feature lets thedriver delay the actual locking of the
vehicle. When the power door lock switch is pressed with
1. With the ignition on, press and hold the power door
the key removed from the ignition, and the driver’sdoor
lock switch. All doors will lock.
open, a chime will sound three timesto signal that the lock
delay mode is active. When all doors have been closed, the 2. Toggle the headlamps switch seven times (off to on
is one toggle). The doors will unlock to confirm that
doors will lock automatically aftertive seconds. If any
the feature is now on.
door is opened before this, the five-secoxld timer will reset
itself once all the doors have been closed again.
3. Release the power door lock switch.
Pressing thedoor lock switch twice within two seconds
To turn the feature off, repeat the previous procedure.
will override this feature.
2-9
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost orstolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle
can have only four transmitters matched to it.
Under normal use, the battery in your key chain
transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.
For battery replacement, use one Duracell@battery, type
DL-2032, or a similar type.
2-10
To replace the battery:
Trunk
1. Insert a coin into the
notch near the keyring. Turn the
coin counterclockwiseto separate the two halves of
the transmitter.
Trunk Lock Release
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil to
remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Remove and replace the battery. Replace it as the
instructions inside the cover indicate.
Be sure not to touchany of the black boxes or the
green surfaces.Any static transferred from your
body to these areasmay cause the transmitter to
be inoperative.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
To unlock the trunk from the outside,insert the door key
and turn it.
Remote Trunk Release
The TRUNK button is
on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
column. The transaxle
must be in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) for it
to work.
5 . Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing and
holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for about
eight seconds.You must be within rangeof the
vehicle. When the transmitter hasbeen
resynchronized, the horn will chirp and the exterior
lamps will flash once.
2-11
Remote Tlrunk R - ease Lockout
The trunk release lockout
switch in the glove box
must be on for the TRUNK
button to work. This feature
allows you to secure items
in the trunk when you must
leave the ignition key with
an attendant.
To secure the trunk, turn off the TRUNK RELEASE,
lock the glove box, then take thedoor key with you.
Now the trunk button to the left of the steering column
will not open the trunk.
I
u.
The optional Remote Keyless Entry transmitter will
open the trunk even if the trunk release lockout switch is
in the off position.
2-12
Trunk Lid
It can be dangerous to drivewith the trunklid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk
lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the sealbetween the body and
the trunklid:
Make sure all windows are shut.
’lhrn the fan on your heating orcooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on
ECON or VENT. That will force outsideair
into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls’’ in
the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them
all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your Buick has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put
on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, thereare ways you can help.
Park in a lighted spot, close
all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storagearea, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leaveyour ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
-- so
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves
don’t do it.
With the ignition OFF and the driver’s door open,you’ll
hear a chimereminding you to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your
steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition
and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking Lots
0
Put your valuables in a storage area, likeyour trunk
or glovebox.
0
Lock the glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key with you.
2-13
Universal Theft-Deterrent (Option)
SECURITY
If your Buick has this
option, it has a
theft-deterrent alarm
system. With this system,
the SECURITY light will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
It will also go off if the trunk lock is damaged. Your
vehicle’s lamps will flash and the horn will sound for
several minutes, then will go off to save battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activateif you
lock the doors with a key or manual door lock.It activates
only if you use a power door lock switch or Remote
Keyless Entry transmitter.You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition keyif
the alarm has been setoff. You must still shutoff the
alarm by inserting the keyin the door lock.
Here’s how toavoid setting off the alarm by accident:
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system when leaving your vehicle.
Activating the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. The SECURITY
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed until
the SECURITY light goes off.
If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, the alarm will go off’.
If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked after the doors
are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use &eRemote
Keyless Entry System transmitter. Unlocking a door
any other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with your key.
You can also turn off the alarm by using the Remote
Keyless Entry transmitter, if you have it. The alarm
won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
How to Test theAlarm
The alarm can be tested by first having the driver’s
window down. Activate the system by lockingthe doors
. with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter. Get outof the car, close the door and
wait for the SECURITY light to go out. Then reach
in
through the window,unlock the door with the manual door
lock and open the door.This should set off the alarrn.
If the alarm does not
sound when it should, check to
see if the hornworks. The horn fusemay be blown. To
replace the fuse, see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers”in
the Index.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate the
theft-deterrent system when leaving
your vehicle.
PASS-Key@I1
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key 11
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS,-Key II is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.
key
PASS-Key 11uses a resistor pellet in the ignition
that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-KeyII system senses thatsomeone is
using the wrong key, it shutsdown the vehicle’s starter and
fuel systems. ‘Forabout three minutes, the starter won’t
work and fuel won’tgo to the engine.If someone triesto
start your vehicle again or uses another key during
this
time, the vehicle will not start.This discourages someone
from randomly trying different keys with different resistor
pellets in an attempt to makea match.
2-15
The ignition key must be clean and dry before it’s
inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the
engine doesnot start and the SECURITY light comes
on, the key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off,
Clean and dry the key. Wait about threeminutes and try
again. The SECURITY light may remain on during this
time. If the starterstill won’t work, and the key appears
to be cleanand dry, wait about threeminutes and try
another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to
check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index). If the starter won’t work with the otherkey, your
vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first
ignition key may be faulty. See your Buick dealer or a
locksmith who can service thePASS-Key 11.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work and the
SECURITY light will flash. But you don’t have to wait
three minutes before trying another ignitionkey.
See your Buick dealer ora locksmith who can service
the PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made.
If you’re ever drivingand and the SECURITY light
comes on and stays on, you will be able torestart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key I1 system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your Buick dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by
the PASS-Key I1 system.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key I1 ignition key, see
your Buick dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
With the ignitionkey in the ignition switch, you can turn
the switch to five different positions.
NOTICE:
Your modern Buick doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (804 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t
yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.
--
Ignition Positions
C
I
--
A
E
ACCESSORY (A): The accessory position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. To use, push in the key and turn it toward
you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, justas it
was before you inserted the key.
2-17
LOCK (B): Before you put the key in, your ignition
will be in the LOCK position. This position locks your
ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a
theft-deterrent feature.
If you leave your key
in the ignition, in the OFF position, you
will hear a warning chime when you open the driver’s door.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
Starting Your Engine
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your car
in motion while the engine is off.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
Key Reminder Warning
START (E): This position starts your engine.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and
you can’t
turn it, be sure itis all the wayin. If it is, then
turn the steeringwheel left and right whileyou
turn thekey hard. But turn thekey only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or theignition switch. If none of this
works, then yourvehicle needs service.
2-18
Don’t try to shift to PARK
(P) if your Buick
is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK(P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat
can damage your starter motor.
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
If you don’t,
equipment, check with your dealer.
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have yourvehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle’’ in the Index.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three to five
seconds at a time until
your engine starts.Wait about 15 seconds between
each try to help avoid drainingyour battery.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),
Try
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again,do the same thing, but this time keep
the pedal down for five or six seconds.This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting about
15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.
I
19
L
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18OC) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easierstarting and
better fuel economy during enginewarm-up. Usually,
the coolantheater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
4. After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to
store thecord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? Theanswer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact
your Buick dealer in the area where you’ll be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxlehas a shift leverlocated on the
steering column.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to usewhen you start your engine because your
vehicle can’tmove easily.
It is dangerous to getout of your vehicleif the
shift lever is not fully in PARK(P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.If
you’re pullinga trailer, see“Towing a Trailer’’ in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range before
starting the engine. Your Buick has a brake-transaxle
shift interlock. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in the RUN position. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P)’ ease pressureon the shift lever and
push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you wish. See “ShiftingOut of PARK (P)”
in this part.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
I NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “If
You’re Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow”in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N)only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL(N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIn (0):
This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
0
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator allthe way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This positionis also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@):
0
When driving on hilly, winding roads
0
When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears
0
When going down a steep hill
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)or
THIRD (3) as much as possible.
Don’t shift intoSECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you evenmore power (but
lower fuel economy) than SECOND(2). You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector
lever is put in FIRST (l), the transaxle won’t shift into
fiist gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your frontwheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happenif you were stuck in
very deep sandor mud orwere up againsta solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t
hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheatand damage the
PARK (P)
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into
to hold your vehicle in position on
a hill.
Parking Brake
This vehicle has a PUSH
TO RELEASE parking
brake pedal. To set the
parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal down
with your right foot. Push
down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on and a single chime will be heard. The parking
brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down and push the parking brake pedal with your
left foot. Thiswill unlock the pedal. When you lift your
left foot, the park brake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
2-24
If you try to drive approximately40 feet (12.2 m)with
and a
the parking brakeon, the brake light stays on
chime sounds untilyou release the parkingbrake.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brakeon can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer andare parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer”in the Index. That section shows
moving.
what to do first to keep the trailer from
Shifting Into PARK (P)
A‘CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever isnot fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly.You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
b:
I
t
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
as follows:
0
2-26
Pull the lever toward you.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehiclewith the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leaveyour vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into the PARK (P)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if
you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pullingit toward you. If you can, it means
that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parkingon a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly beforeyou leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.
If torque lock doesoccur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a littleuphill to take some of the
pressure from the transaxle, so you can pullthe shift
lever out of PARK (P).
lifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your Buick has a brake-transaxle shift interlock.
You have to fully apply your regular brake before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in the
RUN position. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), easepressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into thegear you want. If you ever
hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of
PARK (P), try this:
I
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5 . Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicleand ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, drygrass or other things that
can burn.
I
2-28
I
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked
I
It’s better not to park with the engine running.But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only withall the windows down to
blow out any C O ; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Idling the engine with theair system controloff
could allow dangerous exhaust into yourvehicle
(see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide ( C O )into your vehicle even if
the fan switchis at thehighest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
C O can come ineasily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
--
--
1Windows
Power Windows
It canbe dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re onfairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.
2-30
Switches on the driver’s armrest control each of the
windows while the ignition is on. In addition, each
passenger door has a switch for its own window.
Express-Down Window
Tilt Wheel
The switch for the driver’s window has an express-down
feature. Pull the switch back all the way,release it and the
window will lower automatically. To stop the window
from lowering, push the switch again. To partially open
the window, pull the switch back and quickly release it.
To raise the window, hold the switch forward.
Window Lock
Press the LOCK switch on the driver’s armrest to
disable all passenger window switches. The driver’s
window controls will still be operable. This isa useful
feature when you have children as passengers.
Press the UNLOCK switch toallow passengers to use
their window switches again.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the pad with the horn symbols
on the steering wheel.
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlamp Highbow Beam Changer and
Passing Signal
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
2-32
To signal a lane change, just
raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t
flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
Flash-To-Pass Feature
If a bulb isburned out, replace it to help
avoid an
accident. If the arrowsdon’t go on atall when you
signal aturn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index)
and for burned-out bulbs.
This feature letsyou use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a. driver.in front of ,you thatyou want to pass. It
works even if your headlamps areoff.
lbrn Signal On Chime
To use it, pull the turn signal lever
toward you, but not
If your turn signal is lefton for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 h)a,
chime willsound at each flashof the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the
turn signal lever
to theoff position.
sothat
far
Headlamp HigldLow Beam Changer
youclick.
hear
a
.
,,. .
~
. -
If your headlamps are off or on low beam, your
.
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as
long asyou hold the levertoward you and-the
high-beam indicator on the dashwill come on. Release
the lever toturn the high-beam headlamps off.
To change theheadlamps
from low beam
t,o high
beam or high beam low
to
beam, pull ,the
turn signal
lever towardyou. Then
release it. When the high
beams are on, this lighton
the instrument panelwill
also beon.
..
.
2-33
.dshielr’’
The wiper speed may be set for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
Heavy snow or icecan overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop themotor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the
band marked WIPER.
For a singlewiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move
the band to OFF.
2-34
At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever there’s a
paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid
on the windshield, push the paddle for less than a
second. The wipers will clear the window and either
stop orreturn to your preset speed. For more washer
cycles, push and hold the paddle. Remember, driving
without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad mud
splash can block your vision. You could hit another
vehicle or gooff the road. Check your washer fluid level
often. See“Windshield Washer Fluid” in the index.
When you apply your brakes, the cruisecontrol
shuts off..
A CAUTION:
A CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t useyour washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
0
Cruise Control
0
With cruise control,you can
maintain aspeed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on theaccelerator. This can
really help on long trips.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t useyour cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could losecontrol. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the optional
traction controlsystem begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise controlwill automatically disengage. (See
“TracJion Control System”in the Index.) When
road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again,you
may turn the cruise controlback on.
Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
2-35
I
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shutsoff
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit
a button
and go into cruise whenyou don’t want to.You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switchOFF until you want to useit.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise
control switchfrom ON to
R/A (resume/accelerate) for
about half a second.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-36
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there. Remember that if you hold the switch at R/A
longer than half a second, the vehicle will keep going
faster until you release the switch or apply the brake.
You could be startled and even lose control. So unless
you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
There are twoways to go to a higher speed.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise controlspeed you set earlier.
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for
less thanhalf a second and then release it. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate featurewill only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
0
0
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second.Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shiftto a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applyingthe brake
takes you out of cruise control.Many drivers findthis to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise controlon
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control orthe ignition,
your cruise control setspeed memory is erased.
2-37
Lamps
Lamps On Reminder
Headlamm
If you leave the manual headlamp or parking lamp switch
on, remove the key from the ignition and open the
driver's door, you will hear a continuous warning chime.
The chime will turn off when the lamps are turned off.
These switches control
these systems:
Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (Canada Only)
Taillamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for othersto see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
0
Parking Lamps
0
License Lamps
0
Sidemarker Lamps
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitors
the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and
twilight sentinel, so be sure it isn't covered.
Instrument Panel Lights
Press theLIGHTS switch to turn on the headlamps.
Press it again to turn them off.
Press the PARK switch to turn on the parking lamps.
Press it again to turn them off. (If the parking lamps
were turned on with the PARK switch, they must
be turned off with that switch).
2-38
'
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness in daylight when:
The ignition is on,
0
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your low-beam headlamps
will be on. The parking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker and
other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be
lighted either.
When it is dark enough outside, your low-beam
headlamps will change.to full brightness. The other
lamps that turn on with your headlamps will also turn
on. When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps
will go off, and your low-beam headlamps change to the
reduced brightness of DRL.
To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you are
parked, turn off the headlamps and move the twilight
sentinel control all the way toward MIN. The exterior
lamps will come back on automatically when you move
the transaxle outof PARK (P).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Twilight Sentinel
Twilight sentinel turns your
lamps on and off by sensing
how dark it is outside.
To operate it, leave the lamp
switch off and move the
twilight sentinel control to
any position but MIN.
If you move the control all the way to MAX, your lamps
will remain on for three minutes after you turn off your
engine. If you move the control almost all the way in the
other direction, so it’s just on, the lamps will go off
quickly when you turnoff your engine. You can change
this delay time from only a few seconds to three minutes.
2-39
Interior Lamps
Your optional twilight
sentinel and daytime
running lamps work with
the light sensoron top of
the instrument panel. Don’t
cover it up. If you do it will
read “dark” and the
headlamps will turn on.
Instrument Panel Intensity/Brightness
Control
The instrumentpanel
intensity can be adjusted
by moving this lever
between LO and HI.
The interior courtesy
lamps can be turned on
by sliding the lever all the
way to the right.
ne Out F rture (OF
On vehicles equipped with the optional Remote Keyless
Entry system, the interior lamps will automatically shut
off after a 10 minute period if a door is left ajar. This
feature is designed to help eliminate battery wear down.
n
Courtesy Lamps
Illuminated Entry (Option)
When any door is opened, severallamps go on. They
make it easy foryou to enter and leave the car. You also
can turn these lamps on by sliding the panel lights
switch to INT (Interior).
Press the UNLOCK button on the optionalRemote
Keyless Entry transmitter and the interior courtesy
lamps will come on and stay on for up to a minute.
The lamps will turn off immediately by pressing the
LOCK button on the key transmitter, starting the
engine or activating the power door locks.
Delayed Entry Lighting
When you open the door, the interiorlamps will come
on. When you close the door with the ignition off, the
interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or untilthe
ignition is turned to an on position. Please notethat
locking the doors will override the delayed entry
lighting feature and the lamps will turn off right away.
Perimeter Lighting
Theater Dimming
If your vehicle isnot equipped with twilight sentinel and
perimeter lighting is active, the lights will come on
whenever the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
is pressed.
This feature allows for a three
to five-second fade outof
the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.
Delayed Exit Lighting
With this feature, the interior lamps will come on for
25 seconds afteryou remove the key from the ignition.
This will give you time to findthe door pull handle or
lock switches.
When the UNLOCK button on the key transmitter is
pressed, the headlamps, parking lamps,back-up lamps
and cornering lamps will come on if it is dark enough
outside according tothe twilight sentinel.
This option can be programmed on or off for
each transmitter.
2-41
To turn the feature off
1. Press and hold the door lock switch throughout this
procedure. All the doors will lock.
2. Press the instant alarm on thetransmitter. Perimeter
lighting remains on at this time and the horn will
chirp two times.
3. Press the instant alarm on the key transmitter again.
Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn will chirp
one time.
4. Release the door lock switch.The perimeter lighting
option is now off.
To turn the feature on:
1. Press and hold the door lock switch throughout this
procedure. All doors will lock.
2. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again.
Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will
chirp one time.
Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again.
Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will
chirp twotimes.
4. Release the door lock switch. Theperimeter lighting
option is now on.
2-42
Front seat reading lamps are turned on or off by pressing
the LAMP switch.
Rear Reading-.Lamps(Option)
Mirrors
The lamp, the switch and a coat
hanger are above each
off.
rear door. Slide the switchto turn the lamp on or
Inside Day/Night Manual Rearview Mirror
With Integral Reading Lamps
Battery Rundown Protection
This feature shutsoff the courtesy, reading, trunk, glove
box and visor vanitymirror lamps, if any are left on for
more than 10 minutes when the ignition isoff. This will
keep your battery from running down.
When you are sittingin a comfortable driving position,
adjust themirror so you can see clearlybehind your car.
The day-night adjustmentallows you to adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind you.
The integral reading lamps are turned
on or off by
pressing the toggleswitch at the bottom of the mirror.
These lamps are alsopart of the courtesylamps
described earlierin this section.
2-43
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
(Option)
I
.
This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A photocell on thethe
back of
mirror senses
is when it becoming dark outside. Another
Time Delay
Manual Remote Control Mirror
The automaticmirror has a timedelay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
the day position. This delayprevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
The outsiderearview mirror should be adjusted so you
can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting
in a comfortable drivingposition.
Reverse Gear Dav Mode
The reverse day mode is another important featureof
the electrochromicmirror. When you shift into
REVERSE (R),the mirror changes to the day mode.
This gives you a bright image in the mirror as you
back up.
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.
Adjust the driver’s side outsidemirror with the control
lever on the driver’s door.
To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s
seat and have a passengeradjust the mirror for you.
Outside Manual Adjust Mirror
To adjust the left outside
mirror, rotate the knob
located on the driver’s door.
The right outside mirror
Adjust each mirror so you can just see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
2-45
Outside Power Remote Control Mirror
(Option)
If your Buick has the power
mirror, the control is located
on the driver’s door.
Automatic Dimming Outside Rearview
Mirror (Option)
If you have this option, the driver’s side outside mirror
will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This
feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the
automatic electrochromic day/night rearview mirror. See
“Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror” earlier in
this section.
Convex Outside Mirror
Move the switch in the middle of the control to choose
the right or left mirror. Push the arrow controls in the
direction you want to move the mirror.
Adjust each mirror so you can just see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
2-46
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
A CAT ‘TION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicleon your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Center Console CupholderlCoinholder
(Option)
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Use the door key to lockand unlock the glove box.
To open, lift the latch release on the left ofside
the
glove box door.
The armrest between the front seats opens into
a storage
area. To open it, press the lever
at the. front edge.
'
Inside, acupholder flips forwardand unfolds tohold
two eups. The cupholder is designed to break away
should it receive excessivepressure. If it breaks away,
snap the edges back into place.
There isalso a removablecoinholder, cassette,tape and
compact disc storagearea.
2-47
Convenience Net (Option)
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
To use a lighter, just push the center in all the way and
let it go. When it is ready the center will pop back by
itself. Pull out the entire unit to use it.
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating.If you do, it won’t be able to
it’s
back away from the heating element when
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it
just insidethe back wall of the trunk.
The frontcenter and rear ashtrays may be removed for
cleaning. Hold the sides of the ashtray and then pull the
ashtray up and out.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops. For heavier loads, store them in
the trunk as far forward as you can.
I NOTICE:
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-48
r
Don’t put papers or other
flammable things into your
ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smoking material
could ignite them, causing a damaging fire.
Sun Visors
Dual Sun Visors
Visor Vanity Mirror (Option)
This mirror is on the laJcger of the passenger’s sun visors.
The 1amps.turnon when the mirror cover is opened.
The brightness of the lamp can be adjusted by sliding
Each sun visor has
two parts, so that both the windshield
and door glass canbe shaded at thesame t h e . There is
also a tinted transparent extension thatmay be pulled
outfromtheouter sun visor.
the switch.
2-49
’
,
Instrument Panel
h
2-50
bs
Air Outlet
10. Glove Box
2. Headlamps Switch
11. Climate Control System
3. Parking Lamps Switch
12. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
4. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
13. Ignition Switch
5. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever
6. Instrument Cluster/Gages
7. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
14. Driver’s Side SRS (Air Bag)
a.
17. Trunk Release Button
Audio System
9. Passenger’s Side SRS (Air Bag)
15. Traction Control Switch
16. Fuel Button
18. Hood Release
Instrument PanelClusters
Your instrument panel clusters are designed to let you know aatglance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much
.fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
Your Buick is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters, which includes indicator warning lights and gages
that are explained on the following pages.
60
80
100
120
140
160
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY
Standard Cluster
2-52
8
0
0
Gage Cluster
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) orkilometers
(used in Canada).
Your Buick has a tamper resistant odometer. If you see
bright silver lines between the numbers, you'll know
that someone has probably tried to turn it back. The
numbers may not be true.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if
it can't, then it's set at zero and a label must be put on
the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
A trip odometer can tell how far you have driven since
you last set it to zero. To reset it, push the button.
2-54
Tachometer 0- )tion)
4
3,\ 1 '
5
2 \'
.
'z-0
The optional tachometer
tells you how fast
the engine is going. It
displays engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
RPM X 1000
I NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area or engine damage may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. Thepictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement.
Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just tolet you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight secondsto remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
.’ 1
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 70 seconds. If the
driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-55
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see“Air
Bag” in the Index.
If the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on when you
start your vehicle, or stays on, or comes on when you
are driving, your air bag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
Battel
System WarningLight
VOLT
AIR BAG
AIR
BAG
When you turnthe key to RUN, one of these lights will
come on briefly, to show that your alternator and battery
charging systems are working.
You will see one of these lights flash for a few seconds
when you turn your ignition to RUN or START. Then
the lightshould go out. Thismeans the system is ready.
2-56
If the light stays on, you need service and you should
take your Buick to the dealer at once. To save your
battery until you get there, turn off all accessories and
set your air system to OFF.
Voltage Indicator (Option)
Brake System Warning Light
I
Your Buick’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working,the other part canstill
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well,
l
l If you have the optional
gage cluster, this gage
shows voltage in the
electrical system.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
The normal range is 11 to 15 volts. If the gage
reading staysin either red range, orthe battery warning
light comes one, have your Buick dealer check the
electrical system.
BRAKE
This light should come on
when you turn the ignition
key to START. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn
you if there’s a problem.
(a)
If the light and chime come on while you are driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See“Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
I
j
With the anti-lock brake
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light
is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towedfor service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The
light will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. IT you try to drive off with the parking brake set, a
chime will also come on until you release the parking
brake. If the light and chime stayon after your parking
brake is fully released,it means you have a brake problem
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on,turn the ignition off. Or, if the light
comes on when you’re driving, stop as soonas possible and
turn the ignition off. Then start the engine againto reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you’re driving, your Buick needs service.
If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes,
but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have mti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-58
Traction ControlSystem Warning Light
(Option)
TRACTION
OFF
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the button
located to the left of the steering wheel, thewarning
light will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again. The warning light
should gooff. (See “Traction ControlSystem” in the
Index for more information.)
This warning light should
come on briefly as you start
the engine. If the warning
light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If it stays on, orcomes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, thetraction control system
will turn off and the warning light will come on. If
your brakes begin to overheat, thetraction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on until your brakes cool down.
0
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage (Option)
-
h
If you have the gage cluster,
you have a gage that shows
the enginecoolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into the red
area your engine is too hot!
TEMP
Ty
These lights tell you that yourengine coolant has
overheated or your radiator cooling fans are not working.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible.
In the section “Problems on theRoad,” this manual
explains what to do. See“Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
The engine coolant temperature gage indicates the
coolant temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. The
Canadian instrument panels indicate thecoolant
temperature in degrees Celsius.
That reading means the same thing as the warning light.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
In the section “Problems on the Road,” this manual
explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
2-60
Low Coolant Warning Light
COOLANT
LOW
When this light comes on,
the cooling system is low on
coolant. As a bulb check,it
will come on when the
ignition is in the RUN
position and then go off.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
Your Buick is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
CHECK
If the coolant levelis low, the light will come back on.
If this happens, see“Engine Coolant” in the Index for
proper coolingsystem fill.
the
After the coolant levelis returned to its proper level,
LOW COOLANT light will go off after 20 seconds or
remain off on the next ignition cycle.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions areat acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner
environment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by
Enhanced Diagnostics.) The CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicatethat there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.
2-61
If the Light Is Flashing
NOTICE:
I
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be
as
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not
be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during amalfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-62
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop tJw veJ~icle.Put your vehicle in PARK (P). Turn the
key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine.
If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On
Steady” following.If the light is still flashing follow the
previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or
qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correctthe emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you just put fuel intoyour vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel
cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. Thiswill
allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few
driving trips should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deeppuddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine startsto run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since smallamounts of
air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sureto install the fuel capproperly. It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle intogear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling onaccelerati,on.(These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience this condition, change the fuel brand
you use. It will require at least one fulltank of the
proper fuel toturn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
If you make a hard stop, the light may come on
for a moment.
Engine Oil Pressure Light and Gage
But, when this light cumes on and stays on, it means oil
isn’t going through your engine properly. You could be
low on oil, oryou might have some other oil problem.
See your dealer for service.
OIL
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine canbecome so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
These lights tell you if there could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure. If your car has the optional
gage cluster, you can read your oil pressure directly
from the gage on your instrument panel.
There arethree ways this light can come on briefly,
which is normal and doesn’t show a problem. They are:
The light comes on when you turn your key to RUN.
It goes off once you turn it to START. That’s just a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t, be sure
to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if
something goes wrong.
If you’re “idling” at a stop sign,the light may blink
on and then off.
2-64
I
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from
neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by your
warranty.
1
Check Oil Level Light (Option)
CHECK
OIL LEVEL
The CHECK OIL LEVEL
light is lit for three seconds
as a bulbcheck each time
the ignitionkey is turned to
the RUN position. If the
light doesn’tcome on, have
your vehicle serviced.
If the engine oilis more than one quart low, the light
will come on briefly, then go off for 15-25 seconds, and
then come back on for 20-40 seconds.
However, the system will not registerlow engine oilif it
has not been more than eight minutes since the engine
was shut off.
Change Oil Soon Light (‘Option)
CHANGE
OIL SOON
This light is activated by the
Engine Oil Life Monitor
System. The Engine Oil
Life Monitor determines the
condition of the engine oil
and lets you know when the
oil should be changed. See
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
It does this by electronically receiving data from the
Powertrain ControlModule. The data it receives
contains information about enginespeed (revolutions
per minute), coolant temperatureand vehicle speed. The
Engine Oil Life Monitor uses this data to determine how
much the oil has degraded.
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light comes back on, the
engine oil shouldbe checked at the dipstick then
brought up to the proper level
if necessary. See “Engine
Oil” in the Index.
2-65
When to change your oil depends on driving habits and
conditions because these directly affect engine speed,
coolant temperature and vehicle speed. Because of this,
the CHANGE OIL SOON light may come on as early as
2,000 miles (3 218 km) or less for harsh circumstances.
The CHANGE OIL SOON light is lit for fiveseconds as
a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to the
RUN position. It will stay on for 60 seconds once 90%
of the oil lifehas been used and each time the engine is
started after that. If the CHANGE OIL SOON light is on
continuously, there is a problem with the Oil Life
Monitor System and service is required.
After changing the erzgine oil, the system should he
reset. This will cause the CHANGE OIL SOON light to
be lit for abulb check period of three seconds.
2-66
The reset button is in the glove box. With the ignition
key in the RUN position, push the reset button, hold it in
for at least five seconds but not more than 60 seconds.
After five seconds,the CHANGE OIL SOONlight wiIl
flash four times and then go off. This indicates that the
Oil Life Monitor System has been reset.
Fuel Gage
o\\‘
\
E
It takes a littlemore or less fuelto fill up than the
gage indicated.For example, the gagemay have
indicated thetank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
The gage moves a littlewhen you turn a corner,
speed up, or make a hard
stop.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
Low Fuel Light (Option)
Your fuel gage shows about
how much fuel is in your
tank. It works only when the engineis on. When the
indicator nearsempty (E), you still have alittle fuel left.
You need to get morefuel right away.
Here are some things that
some owners ask about. None
of these showa problem with your fuel gage:
@
At the service station, thegas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full
(F).
If your Buick has this
option, a light near the fuel
gage will come onwhen
you are low on fuel. You
should get more fuel as
soon as you can.
NOTES
2-68
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this sectionyou’ll find out how to operate thecomfort
control systemsand audio systems offered with your
Buick. Be sure toread about the particularsystem
supplied withyour vehicle.
Electronic Touch Climate Control
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your comfort control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
With these systems,you can controlthe heating,
cooling and ventilation in your Buick. Your vehicle also
has a flow-through ventilation system described later
in this section.
If your Buick has this climate control system,the
following information tells you how it works.
3-1
HI
The FAN control is used to select the speed of the
blower fan and the force of air you want. There are four
speeds tochoose from. Moving the leverbetween LOW
and HIGH will decrease orincrease the fan speed.The
fan will be off when the system is off.
This leverregulates the temperature of the air coming
through the system. Move theTEMPERATURE lever to
change the temperature of the air coming through your
outlets. Move the lever between COOL and WARM to
lower orraise the temperature.
lode C o
-01s
The buttons on your system allow you to choose
settings to deliver air through lower, middle or
windshield outlets.
RECIRC: Press this button to limit the amount of air or
cool the air in your vehicle. To turn off RECIRC, press
the button again. If you select FRONT defrost or
BLEND while RECIRC is selected, the system will
automatically turn off RECIRC to prevent fogging.
VENT This setting directs airflow through the middle
instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning
compressor is not working when VENT is selected.
HTR: This button directs air out of the heater outlets.
Most of the air will come from the floor outlets while
some of it will flow through the windshield and side
window outlets. The air conditioningcompressor is not
working when HTR is selected.
BLEND: When BLEND is selected, the airflow will be
split between the windshield and the floor outlets. The
air conditioning compressor will be operating.
FRONT: This setting directs most of the airflow toward
the windshield.
OFF: The ventilation system always allows fresh air to
flow through your Buick when the vehicle is moving.
The system will try to keep the air at a previously
chosen temperature. When the system is off, the blower
fan is also off.
MAX: This setting directs airflow through the middle
instrument panel outlets.
NORM: This setting cools the air entering your vehicle
and directs it through the middle instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEV: This setting directs warm air to the floor and
cooler air tothe middle instrument panel outlets.
Dual Automatic ComforTemp
Climate Control (Option)
If the display is flashing after the system is started, you
should see your dealer forservice.
If your Buick has the dual automaticcomfortemp
climate control option, the following information tells
you how it works.
Temperature Button
You will hear a beep each time a button is pushed and a
small light on the button will indicate which buttons are
active. The lights areon all buttons except TEMP, FAN
and AIR FLOW. The display will show fan, temperature
and mode settings fora few seconds whenever AUTO is
selected, and then display the outside temperature. The
outside temperaturereading is most accurate when
driving. During stops, the displayshows the previous
temperature forbest accuracy and system control.
To adjust the temperature you want maintained inside
the vehicle, push the TEMP button. If you want warmer
air, push the red arrow. If you want cooler air, push the
blue arrow. Note the degree selection on the display.
Fan Button
The speed of the blower fan is controlled automaticallyif
you have the system set forAUTO. Pressing the FAN
button will display and hold the current blower fan setting.
If you want the blower fan to run at a lower speed, push
the bottom of the FAN button. The fan speed will
decrease with every push of the button until the lowest
speed is reached. If you want to increase the fan speed,
push the top of the FAN button. Notice the fan
indicators on the display.
Mode Controls
Your comfort control system has different buttons that
allow air delivery through the floor, middle or windshield
outlets. The system will stay in theselected mode if a
different button is pressed or the AUTO button is pressed.
3-3
UP
-
atm
When the system is set for AUTO, the system adjusts
automatically to changes in temperature to maintain your
temperature setting. The system may supply cooler air to
the side towards the sun. Air will come from the floor,
middle and windshield outlets. The fan speed will vary as
the system maintains the selected temperature setting.
To find your comfort zone, start with a 75 O F (24°C)
temperature setting, allow about 20 minutes for the
system to regulate. Press the TEMP button up or down to
adjust the temperature setting if necessary. If you choose
the temperature setting of 60 OF (15 C), the system will
remain at that maximum cooling setting and will not
regulate the fan speed. If you choose the temperature
setting of 90°F (33"C), the system will remain at that
maximum heating setting and will not regulate thefan
speed. Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the system to heat or cool any faster.
O
Pressing the AUTO button will display the requested
temperature, fan speed and air delivery mode for five
seconds, then change to display the outside air
temperature. Be careful not to put anything over the
sensors on top of the dash. Thesesensors are used by the
automatic system to regulate temperature and the system
may not respond correctly.
c
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on outside air temperature,
engine coolant temperature, and time since the engine
was last started. Pushing the FAN, AIR FLOW or
FRONT buttons will override this delay, and change the
fan to a selected single speed.
If you leave your vehicle, the system will remember the
control setting the next time you start your engine.
You may also manually adjust the air delivery or fan speed.
OFF: Press this button to turn the system off.
Fresh air will-continueto flow through the vehicle, and
the system will try to maintain the previously set
temperature. The outside temperature will show on the
display when the system is OFF.
AIR FLOW: This button is usedto change the
direction of the airflow. The airflow choices available are
WINDSHIELD, MID and FLOOR.If the system isset
for AUTO, pressing the AIR FLOW button will display
the current airflow direction. Press the AIR FLOW up or
down arrows againto change the direction of the airflow.
If the up AIR FLOW button is selected while in the
FRONT defrost mode, the system will direct the air
toward the floorand windshield outlets. If the down
AIR FLOW button is selected while in the FRONT
defrost mode, thesystem will send the air toward the
floor and FRONT will cancel. The arrows will appear
on the display.
VENT The VENT button allows fresh air to flow through
your Buick without the air conditioning compressor
working. AUTO andVENT may be selected at thesame
time so the system will maintain the temperature selected.
Press the button againto turn off the VENT selection.
RECIRC: Press this button to limit the amount of fresh
air entering your vehicle. You may use this setting to
limit odors enteringyour vehicle. Press RECIRCto
change to a manual MODE and air will recirculate for
10 minutes. RECIRC will show on the display and then
return to EXT temperature display.
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reducesthe time it takes for your
vehicle to cooldown. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to
work its best.
If you have the electronic touch system, forquick
cool-down on very hot days, use MAX with the
temperature and fan speed adjusted to COOLand
HIGH. If this settingis used for long periods of time, the
air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry.
For normal cooling on hot days, useNORM and
adjust the temperature and fan speed for your comfort.
If RECIRC is selected while in the NORM air
conditioning mode, the system works like MAX and
recirculates the air.
On sunny days, when the air is moderately warm or cool,
use BI-LEV to deliver warm air to thefloor and cooler
air to the middle instrument panel outlets. On days like
these, the sun may adequately warm your upper body, but
your lower body may not be warmenough. To warm or
cool the air delivered, adjust the TEMPERATURE lever.
The amount of fresh air enteringthe vehicle is limited
when RECIRC is selected. Thisis helpful when you are
trying to coolthe air in your vehicle or limitthe air
entering thevehicle for some other reason.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle's engine speed
and power. This is normal because the system is
designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep
the desired temperature,
Heating
Ventilation System
If you have the electronic touch system, on cold days,
use HTR with the TEMPERATURE lever toward
WARM. If youhave the dual automatic cornfortemp
system, pressAUTO and adjust the temperature by
pressing the TEMP up or downarrow. You may also
adjust the dual automatic comfortemp system manually
by pressing the AIR FLOW button until FLOOR
appears. Again, adjust the temperature by pressing the
TEMP up or down arrow.
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT (on the electronic touch
system or manual operation of the dual automatic
comfortemp system) to direct outside airthrough your
vehicle. Air will flow through the middle instrument
panel outlets.
With each system, outside airwill be brought in and sent
through the floor outlets. The heater
works best if you
keep your windows closed while using it.
3-6
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it’s moving. When the
vehicle is not moving, you can get outsideair to flow
through by selecting any air choice(except the rear
window defogger) and any fan speed.
Adjust the direction of
airflow by moving the
louvered vents.
When you enter a vehiclewith the electronic touch
system in cold weather, select HTR to supply air
through the floor outlets. Thenmove the FAN lever
to HIGH for a few moments before driving away.
This will blow moist air from the intake outlets
toward the floor, not the windshield. It reduces the
chance of fogging your windows. If you have the
dual automaticcomfortemp system, the AUTO
setting will do this for you.Manual operation of the
automatic comfortemp system in the FLOOR mode
will also supply air throughthe floor outlets.
Keep the air path under the front seats clearof
objects. This helps air to circulate
throughout
your vehicle.
If you have the rear passengercomfortemp option,
you can adjust the direction of the airflow to the rear
seating area.
mtilation 1
' . lp
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will work better, reducing the chance of
fogging your windows.
When the engine idles for a longtime, the exterior
temperature sensormay cause thesystem to blow air
that is too cool. Once the vehicle is moving again,
the system will try to maintain the set temperature
inside your vehicle.
When you start your vehicle and the EXT display
flashes (dual automatic comfortemp system only)
for some time, the system may need repair. See your
Buick dealer.
3-7
On cool, humid days, use FRONT to keep the
windshield and side windows clear and to quickly
remove fog, frost or ice from the windshield.
If you have the the electronic touch system, adjust the
TEMPERATURE lever toward WARM and the FAN
lever toward HIGH.
If you have the dual automatic cornfortemp system,
while in the AUTO mode, the fan speed will vary. If a
manual fan speed setting is selected, the fan speed will
remain at that selection until the engine is turned off or
another selection has been made. To turn off FRONT,
press AUTO or AIR FLOW.
The lines you see on the
rear window warm the
glass. Press this button to
start warming your window.
After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself, orpressing the
button during the heating cycle will turn it off. If you
need additional warming time, push the button again.
The system will then operate for five minutes before
going off by itself.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid or the
integrated rear window antenna,and the repairs
wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.
,,senger Cnr
If you have the dual
automatic cornfortemp
system, the front seat
passenger can control the
air temperaturein their
seating area.
Steering Wheel Controls for Climate
Control (Option)
If your vehicle has this
feature, you can control the
temperature functionby
using the button on your
steering wheel. Press the
TEMP up arrow to increase
the temperature and the
TEMP downarrow to
decrease the temperature.
This canbe set up to 5 OF (- 15 C) cooler or warmer than
the primary setting. To activate the passenger control,
simply press the COOL or WARM buttons located on
the passenger door.
O
The indicator lights above the control will show the
difference from the main temperature setting.To turn off
this part of the system,push the OFF button on the main
control panel once.
If the passenger controlhas been turned on, itcan be
turned off by pressing the OFF button once. Pressing the
OFF button a second time will turn off the main system.
3-9
4udio Syste===,
Your Delco@audio system has been designed to operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you're
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into it.
'ting the ClocK
Press and hold HRS until the correct hour appears.
Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears.
You may set the clock with the ignition off if you
press RECALL first and follow the same procedure
described above.
--lgthe Radio
VOLUME: Turn the upper VOLUME knob to turn the
system on and off. Turn it clockwise to increase volume
and counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall the
station being played or to display the clock. To change
what is normally shown on the display (station or time),
press the knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob until the display flashes. If you press the
knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
.~,
3-1..
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM, FM1 or
FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the forward or backward arrow to go to
the next hgher or lower station. The sound will be
muted while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for few
a seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for few
a seconds, then go on to the next
station. Pressone of the SEEK arrows again to stop
scanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.
P SCAN: Press this buttonto listen to each of your preset
stations fora few seconds.The radio will go to the frst
preset station, stopfor a few seconds, thengo on to the
next preset station. PressP SCAN again to stop scanning.
The radio will not stop at a preset if the station is weak.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends.Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Press this button lightly so it extends.Turn the
knob to increase or decrease treble.
Push the knobs back in when you’re not using them.
Adjusting the Speakers
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons
let you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. Use the middle
position to balance thesespeakers.
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. Use the middle
position to balance these speakers.
2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.
4. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
3-11
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
RECALL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall the
station being played or todisplay the clock. To change
what is normally shown on the display (station or time),
press the knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob until the display flashes. If you press the
knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to select AM, FM1 or
FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the forward or backward arrow to go to
the next higher or lower station. The sound will be
muted while seeking.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Turn this knob to turn the system on and
off. Turn it clockwise to increasethe volume. Turn it
counterclockwise to decreasethe volume.
3-12
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows fortwo seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop
scanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).
Adjusting the Speakers
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. Use the middle
position to balance these speakers.
2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.
the sound to the front or rear speakers.Use the middle
position to balance these speakers.
4. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
Playing a Cassette Tape
P SCAN: Press this button to listen toeach of your
will go to
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio
the first preset station, stop for a few seconds,
then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase ordec.reasebass.
TREB: Press this button lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increaseor decrease treble.
Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.
The longer sidewith the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape will
begin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, TREB and BASS controls justas you do for the
radio. Other controls may have different functions when
a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is
off, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that the
cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc
players may not work in your cassette player. These
adapters can cause an error message on the display, and
the adapter cassette couldbe ejected.
3-13
Your tape bias is set automatically.
00 (6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
SEEK: Press the forward or backward arrow to search
The display will show either OFF or ON for afew
seconds when you press the button.
for the next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for SEEK to work. The sound will be muted
while seeking.
(((3): Press this button
to reversethe tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tape reverses.
bb (4): Press this button to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press the button again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play while the tape
advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
2 1 A
Dolby@Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the doub1e-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean itas soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player.
See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
and Automatic Tone Control
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall thestation
To change what is
being played or to display the clock.
normally shown on the display (station or time),press
this button until you see the display you want, then hold
the button until the display flashes.If you press the
button when the ignitionis off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to select AM, FMl or FM2.
The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to choose
radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrows to go to the
next higher or lower station. The sound will be muted
while seeking.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Press this knob toturn the system on and
off. Turn it clockwiseto increase thevolume. Turn it
counterclockwise to decreasethe volume.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows fortwo seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for afew seconds. Theradio will go to
a station, stop fora few seconds, then go on to thenext
station. Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stop
scanning. Thesound will be muted while scanning.
3-15
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2).
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decreasetreble.
3. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset treble
and bass equalization settings designed for classical,
pop, rock, jazz,talk and country/western stations.
CLASS will appear on the display when you first press
TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will
appear on the display. Press it again after C & W
appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will
return to the TREB and BASS knobs. Also, if you use
the TREB and BASS knobs, control will return to them
and MANUAL will appear.
5. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the TONE you selected
will be automatically selectedfor that button.
P SCAN:Press this button to listen to each of your
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop for afew seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
AUTO SET: Press this button and the system will seek
and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM
stations on your preset buttons (depending on which
band (AM or FM) you are listening to). To return to the
stations you manually set, press AUTO SET again.
idjusting the Speake
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. Use
the middle position to balance these speakers.
FADE: Turn the knob to move the sound
to the fi-ont or rear
speakers. Use the middle position
to balance these speakers.
Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side withthe tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, thetape will
begin playing. If you hear nothing or hear agarbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing,use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, TREB and BASS controls justas you do for the
radio. Other controls may have different functionswhen
a tape is inserted. The displaywill show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tapewhen the ignition or radio is
off, first press EJECT or RECALL.Note that the
cassette tape adapterkits for portablecompact disc
players may not work in your cassette player. These
adapters can cause an error message on the display, and
be ejected.
the adapter cassette could
Your tape bias is set automatically.
PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to
work. The sound will be muted while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press thisbutton to search for the next
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to
work. The sound will be muted while seeking.
The SEEK up and down arrows will also findthe
previous and next selections on the tape.
44 (3): Press thisbutton to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radiowill
play while the tape reverses.
,,
(4): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Pressthe button again to
return to playing speed. The radio will play while the
tape advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
00 (6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
3-17
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. TAPE with an arrow will
appear on the display when the tape is active.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage toyour tapes and player. See
“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After
you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five
seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radiowill
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
3-18
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock.
To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time),press
the button until you see the displayyou want, then hold
the button until the display flashes.If you press the
button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
Finding a Station
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons.
AM-FM: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
The display shows your selection.
5. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the TONE you selected
will be automatically selectedfor that button.
TUNE: Press the up or down arrows to choose
radio stations.
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2).
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.
3. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
P SCAN: Press thisbutton to listen to each of your
SEEK: Press the up or
down arrows to go to the next higher
or lower station.The sound will be muted while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop fora few seconds, thengo on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop
scanning. Thesound will be muted while scanning.
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop fora few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again tostop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
3-IY
'laying a Con Sct Disc
ng th ?one
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decreasebass.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease
treble.
If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio
is off, first press EJECT or RECALL.
Push the knobs back in when you are not using them.
If you're driving on a very rough road or if it's very hot,
the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear on
the display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play. If
the disc comes out, it could be that:
TONE: This feature allowsyou to choose preset treble
and bass equalization settings designed for classical,
pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations.
CLASS will appear on the display when you first press
TONE. Each time you press it, anothersetting will
appear on the display. Press it again after C & W
appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will
return to the TREB and BASS knobs. Also, if you use
the TREB and BASS knobs, controlwill return to them
and MANUAL will appear.
ljusting the SpeDk. ,
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this
knob to move the sound to the left orright speakers.
Use the middle position to balance these speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
Use the middle position to balance thesespeakers.
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
It is very humid.(If so, wait aboutan hour andtry agam.)
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long it has been playing. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
button until you see the display you want, then hold the
button until the display flashes.
PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of the
current track if more than eight secondshave played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc. The
sound will be muted while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc.
The sound will be muted while seeking.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system,the disc will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last-selected audio source.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections onthe disc.
SOURCE: Press this knob to change to the disc function
when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted, the disc will
play until you press AM-FM. Then the disc will stop
playing and the radio will play. Press
SOURCE again to
play a disc again. CD PLAY will show on the display.
44 (3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track (song). You will hear sound.
EJECT Press this button to remove the disc. The radio
will play.
bb (4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track (song). You will hear sound.
RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order.
3-21
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
and Compact Disc Players and
Automatic Tone Control
the RECALL button until you see thedisplay you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock
will show for a few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to select AM, FMl or FM2.
The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press theup or down arrow to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrows to go to the
next higher or lower station. The sound will be muted
while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows fortwo seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for few
a seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop
scanning. The sound will be muted while scanning.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume. Turn it
counterclockwise to decreasethe volume.
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or todisplay the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
3-22
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2).
1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or SEEK.
3. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
4. Press andhold one of the six numbered buttons.
5 . The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return andthe TONE you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
P SCAN: Press thisbutton to listen toeach of your
TONE: This feature allowsyou to choose preset treble
and bass equalization settings designed for classical,
pop, rock, jazz,talk and country/western stations.
CLASS will appear on the display when you first press
TONE. Each time you press it, anothersetting will
appear on the display. Press it again after C & W
appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will
return to the TREB and BASS knobs. Also, if you use
the TREB and BASS knobs, controlwill return to them
and MANUAL will appear.
preset stations for afew seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop for few
a seconds, then go
on to the next presetstation. Press P SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
Adjusting the Speakers
AUTO SET Press this buttonand the system will seek
and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM
stations on your preset buttons. To return to the stations
you manually set, press AUTO SET again.
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. Use
the middle position to balance these speakers.Push the
knob back in when you are notusing it.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
Push the knob back in
when you are not using it.
FADE: Press this button lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
Use the middle position to balance thesespeakers. Push
the knob back in when you are not using it.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease
treble. Push the knob back
in when you are not using it.
3-23
ssette Tape
The longer sidewith the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on,the tape will
begin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, TREB and BASS controls justas you do forthe
radio. Other controls may have different functions when
a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radiois
off, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that the
cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc
players may not work in your cassette player. These
adapters can cause an error message on the display, and
the adapter cassette could be ejected.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to
work. The sound will be muted while seeking.
3-24
NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to
work. The sound will be muted while seeking.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the tape.
44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. Theradio will
play while the tape reverses.
bb (4): Press this button to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press the button again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play while the tape
advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape or
disc function when the radio is on. If both a tape and a
disc are installed, the system will first go to tape play;
TAPE will appear on the display. If SOURCE is pressed
again, the system will go to disc play; CD will appear on
the display.
EJECT The system has two EJECT buttons. Press the
button near the CD slot to remove a disc. Press the button
near the tape slot to remove a tape. The radio will play.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tapeplayer needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player.
See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds toreset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicatorwas reset.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
You may turn Dolby off by pressing the number
six preset.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a discpartway into the slot, label sideup. The
player will pull it in. The discshould begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD while theignition or the radio
is off, first press EJECT or RECALL.
If you’re drivingon a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and an error code may appear on
the display. Press RECALL totake the error code off the
display. When things get back to normal, the disc should
play. If the disc comes out, it could be that:
0
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
3-25
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five secondsto see how
long ithas been playing. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of the
current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc. The
sound will be muted while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc.
The sound will be muted while seeking.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the disc.
..
44 (3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track (song). You will hear sound.
(4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track (song). You will hear sound.
RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radiowhen a disc
is in the player.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a discin the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last-selected audio source.
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted,
the disc will play until you press AM-FM. Then the
disc will stop playing and the radio will play. Press
SOURCE again to play a disc again. CD PLAY will
show on the display.
EJECT Press this button to remove the disc.
The radio will play.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theftof your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable
all radio
functions whenever battery power,isremoved.
If THEFTLOCK is active, the THEFTLOCK indicator
will flash when the ignitionOFF.
is
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignitionto the ACCESSORY or
RUN position.
3. Turn the radio off.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may
be used or
ignored. If ignored, the systemplays normally and the
radio isnot protected by the feature.If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio willnot operate if stolen.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on thedisplay. Next you will use the
secret codenumber which you have written down.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will
display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radiowith the secret code
before it will operate.
6. Press MIN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
with your code.
Activating theTheft-Deterrent Feature
The instructionswhich follow explainhow to enteryour
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK
system. It is
recommended thatyou read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time.and you must start the procedure over
at Step 4.
1
5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
two digits agree
7. Press H R S to make the first one or
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret codeyou have written down.
The display will show REP to letyou know that you
need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this timethe display will show
SEC to letyou know that your radio issecure.
%
3-27
c
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret codeas follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
1. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or
RUN position.
2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press MIN again to make thelast two digits agree
with your code.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
agree with your code.
4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
5 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOPwill
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with theignition on beforeyou can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose orforget your code, contact your dealer.
5. Press MIN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is given to a secured radio, the
radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.
3-28
Steering Wheel Controls (Opwmu--,
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions usingthe buttons on your steering wheel.
Some steeringwheel controls may operate climate
controls. See “SteeringWheel Controls for Climate
Control” earlierin this section.
SEEK: Press this
button to go to the
next higher orlower
radio station.
SCAN: Press this button to scan the stations preseton
your radio pushbuttons. This featureworks like your
radio’s P SCAN button and allows you to listen to each
of your preset stations for afew seconds. Theradio will
go to the first preset station, stopfor a few seconds,then
go to the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
AM-FM: Press thisbutton to choose AM, FM1 or FM2.
VOL: Press the up arrow
to increasethe volume
and the down arrow to
decrease volume.
SRCE: If you have radio-only controls, you will have
this control. Press SRCE to play a cassette tape or
compact disc when the radio is playing. If both a tape
and disc are installed,the system will first go to tape
play. Press SRCE again to go to disc play.
MUTE: If you have radio-only controls, you will have
this control. PressMUTE to silence the system.
Understanding Radio Receptic
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interferewith FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
AM
The range formost AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range,however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like stormsand power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reducethis noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
3-30
To help avoid hearing loss ordamage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s
engine, Delco radio or othersystems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operationof sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
--
--
~~
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape playerthat is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes ora damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be storedin their
cases away from contaminants,direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failureof the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If younotice a reduction in
sound quality, trya known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassetteturn. It
is normal for the cassette toeject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough
cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassetteis
available through your Buick dealer.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject. It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing
tvPe cleaner.
Lassettes are subject to wear and the souna quamy may
degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-31
Heated BackliteAntenna
Your AM-FM antenna is now integrated, with your rear
window defogger, into your rear window. Be sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
Do not try to clear frostor other material from the inside
of the rear window withan ice scraper, credit cardor other
hard object. This may damage the rear defogger grid and
affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly.
C
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it means a defogger
grid line has been damaged and must be repaired. Your
radio is not at fault.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone toyour Buick,
and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure
that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna. There’s a square notch at the middle of the
glass, between the second and third grid lines, for you to
attach a cellular telephone antenna.
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device inyour
Buick: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways,it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other driversare going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Beready for their mistakes.
Here you’ll find information about drivingon different
kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve
also includedmany other useful tips on driving.
Rear-end collisions areabout the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance.It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-1
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solvethis highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive?It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive avehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
0
Judgment
0
Muscular Coordination
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking. For persons under 2 1,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
4-2
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
0
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. Theperson would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries,it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.For example, if
the same person drank threedouble martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinkingwill have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is agender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired ata BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired atBAC levels above0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chanceof being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who havea BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver havinga collision is 12 times greater; ata level
of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to riditself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else aboutdrinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-4
I
Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride
with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver whowill
not drink.
--
--
I
Control of a Vehicle
.
You have threesystems that makeyour vehicle gowhere
you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steering
and
the accelerator. All three systemshave to do theirwork
at the places where the tires meet theroad.
Braking
,
.
.
Braking action involvesperception time and reaction time.
First, you have to decide topush on thebrake pedal.
That’s perception time.Then you have tobring up your
foot and do it.That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be lesswith one driver
and as long as twomor three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight allplay a part. So do alcohol, drugsand
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 h/h)
travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lotof distance inan emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; and the conditionof your brakes.
Sometimes, aswhen you’re drivingon snow or ice,it’s
easy to ask more of those controlsystems than the tires
and road can provide. That
means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will
eliminate alot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stopswhile you’re driving,brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stopand the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-Lock Brakes
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, orwhen you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This isnormal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
“
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could.The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
., .
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
system working, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Traction Control System (Option)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning tolose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine power
to limit wheel spin.
4-8
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in
the Index.)
TRACTION
OFF
When the system is on, this
warning light will come on
to let you know if there’s a
problem with your traction
control system.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. (You
should turn the system off if your vehicle evergets stuck
in sand, mud, ice orsnow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
To turn the system off,
press the TRACTION
CONTROL button on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
The traction control system warning light will come
on and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button, the warning light will come
on -- but the system won’t turn off right away. It will
wait until there’s no longer a currentneed to limit
wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The traction control system warning
light should go off.
Braking in Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steeringcan help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-9
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnasteer
Your vehicle is equipped with GM Magnasteer a
steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you
feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firrn, solid feel at highway speeds.
T’,
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
4-10
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Unless you have traction control and the system
is on, adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, doit before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a-reasonable,steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for
evasive action -- steering around the problem.
Your Buick can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies’’ earlier in this section.)It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand.But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations arealways
possible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4- 11
3ff‘Ta d n e c
n
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto theshoulder while
you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
issing
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face
with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
fl/
edge of paved surface
If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can seea sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to
pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following tooclosely reduces your area
of vision, especiallyif you’re following alarger
vehicle. Also,you won’t have adequate spaceif the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back
a reasonable distance.
When it looks like achance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move intothe
other lane.If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start”that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to causeyou to cancelyour pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for anotheropportunity.
If other cars are linedup to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance overyour shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal beforemoving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are farenough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front inyour
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicleyou
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
e Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or startingto turn.
e If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver toget ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to
the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving expertssay about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seekan escape route or area of
less danger.
4-13
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
In a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by talung reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
The three types of skids correspond to your Buick’s
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
three control systems. In thebraking skid, your wheels
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
vehicle control more limited.
much speed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
(including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear).
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.You
the accelerator pedal.
may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle
is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues-- such as
If you have the traction control system,remember: It
enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a
helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
“mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you have
If you do not have traction control, orif the system is
any doubt.
off, then an acceleration skid is alsobest handled by
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
Driving at Night
a Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reducethe
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since youcan’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can lightup only so much road ahead.
a In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older thesedifferences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One
reason is thatsome drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjustingto night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
4-15
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are facedwith severe glare (asfrom a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or avehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glasson your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a filmcaused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far lessof a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier topick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for drivingon dry pavement.
The heavierthe rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain
can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fastthrough large water puddles oreven
going through some carwashes can cause problems,too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
.
Wet brakes can cause accide
They won’t work
well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one
side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle ofwater or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
ydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little orno contact with the road.
4-17
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. Butitcan if your
tires haven’t much tread or if the.pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lotof water is standing on
telephone
the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t ahard and fast ruleabout hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving
Through
Deep
Standing
Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
a Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just
your parking lamps --,to help make you more visible
to others.
a Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and beprepared to haveyour view restricted
by road spray.
a Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine..Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
4-18
- .
I
?
ty Driving
v *
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other driversare doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
0
Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get
a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of
the city just as you would for across-country trip.
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corneris busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before you
start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
4-19
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as apassing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave thefreeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stopand back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
Buick dealerships all across North America. They’1.l be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid:Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean insideand outside?
0
Wiper Blades:Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving?Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid amajor storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’reready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a longtrip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out.Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
4-21
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it justplain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service
or parking area and take a nap,get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-22
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularlyin steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here aresome tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
A CAUTION:
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts canwork hard on
mountain roads.
.
.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have .to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your enginerunning
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing toknow is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift toa lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
Know how to go uphill. Shift down to THIRD (3).
This will help cool your engine and transaxle, and
you can climb the hillbetter.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’tswing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
9 As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
e You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing
or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
0
If you don’t shift down, your brakes couldget so
hot that they wouldn’t work
well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none going down ahill.
You could crash. Shift down tolet your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
L
4-23
Winter Driving
1
i
\
Here are some tip? forwinter driving:
Have your Buick in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-24
Include anice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer
clothing, asmall shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or d couple of burlap bags
to help providetraction. Be sure you properly secure
these itemsin your vehicle.
.
Driving on Snow orIce
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32 O F ; 0”C>and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving onwet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction
control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast,the drive wheels will spin and polish
the surface under the tires even more.
4-25
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0
f i t on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody
insulators from newspapers,burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keepwarm.
.
,
L
I
’
,
0
Snow can trapexhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill
you. You can’t see it orsmell it,so you might not
know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collectthere.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
I
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. Whenyou run the engine, makeit go alittle faster
than just idle. That push
is, the acceleratorslightly. This
uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, andpossibly for signaling lateron
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.
You can run the engine
to keep w a r m , but be careful.
4
4-27
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
FRT. CTR. RR.
TOTAL LBS.
KG
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY
WEIGHT
XXX
COLD
TIRE
PRESSURE
TIRE
SPEED
SIZE
RTG
PSLKPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
4-28
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also givesyou
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE
GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells youthe gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR(Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never
exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR)for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don't carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in
your trunk.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break,
or it can change theway your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control. Also,
overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail becauseof overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else-- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop orturn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they'llkeep going.
I A .CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stopor turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put themas far forward asyou can.
Try to spread the weightevenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside thevehicle so that some of them are
above the topsof the seats.
Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can.
Electronic Level Control (Option)
This featurekeeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It is automatic -- you do not need to
adjust anything.
Towing a Trailer
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not workwell or even at all. You
and your passengers could
be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
Ask your Buick dealer for
steps in this section.
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
>
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow
the advice in this part, and
see your Buick dealer
for important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-30
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
3800 (L36) engine and proper trailer towing equipment.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer’’ that appears later in this section.
But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it aremany
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced towork harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincialpolice.
0
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer aboutsway controls.
0
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km)your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts couldbe damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
0
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg).
But even that can be tooheavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude,road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle isused to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or
advice, oryou can write us at:
Buick Motor Division,
Customer Assistance Center
902 E. Hamilton Avenue
Flint, MI 48550
In Canada,write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Qshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
Three important considerationshave to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailertongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-31
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total capacity
weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
vour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing hitch, the
trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12% of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tiresare inflated to the
recommended pressure for cold tires. You’ll find these
numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
A
4-32
B
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
0
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadlycarbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or
other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to
read and follow the instructions forthe trailer brakes
so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into
your vehicle’s brake system.If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
4-33
Driving with a Railer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out forthe open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving isnow a good deal longerand not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle isby itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
4-34
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
I NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer tocome in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus,you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a
trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if
one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your
vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure
they’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailer
lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one
of your vehicle lamps is out.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grad4
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasherand/or extra wiring. Check
with your Buick dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change
lanes or stop.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to THIRD (3) and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
4-35
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking ona Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s
how to do it:
Shift into a gear; and
0
Release the parking brake.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2 . Let up on the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil,belts, cooling system and brake adjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-36
@ Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do aboutsome problems that
can occur on the road.
Hazard Warnmg Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem.Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press the button in to make
your front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on
and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
5-1
To turn off the flashers,
pull out on the collar.
When the hazard warning flashers are on,your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the sideof the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
Buick. But please follow the steps below to do it safely.
5-2
Batteries can hurtyou. They canbe dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn
you.
They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt
you.
NOTICE:
Remember that ignoring these steps
could result
in costly damage to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start yourBuick by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negativeground system.
NOTICE:
If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause aground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your Buick, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.Set the
parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an
automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual
transaxle in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well
as radios. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition,it could save your radio.
I NOTICE:
If you leave your radioon, it could bebadly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered
by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
..
A
..
/!1 CAC ,,O
An electric fan can start up
even when the engine
is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-3
- I
~
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Using a match neara battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You don’t
need to add water to the
Delco Freedom@ battery
installed in every newGM vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, besure the right amountof fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that
first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you.
Don’t get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or onyour skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a shortthat would damage
the battery and maybe other parts, too.
Fans or othermoving engine parts can injureyou
badly. Keep your hands away from
moving parts
once the engines are running.
7 . Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-5
I) 8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
..
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative cable doesn’t go to
the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part
on theengine of the vehicle with the dead battery.
1
9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that
move. The
electrical connection is
just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
I
I
‘
I
11. Try to start thevehicle with the deadbattery.
If it won’t start after afew tries, itprobably
needs service.
12. Remove thecables.in reverseorder. Take care that
they don’t touch each other any
or other metal.
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or a professional
towing
service tow your Buick.
If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero .skirting, or special tires
and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not becorrect.
Before you do anything,turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell thetowing service:
That your vehicle can only be towed with certain
equipment, as described laterin this section.
A. Heavy Metal EnginePart
B. Good Battery
0
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
0
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let tow
the operator
know that this manualcontains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations. The operatormay want
to seethem.
C . Dead Battery
5-7
I
CAUTION: (Continued)
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when
towing it.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
A CAUTION:
To help avoid injury toyou or others:
Never let passengers ridein a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe orposted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
CAUTION: (Continued‘)
5-8
A vehicle can fall froma car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause
a collision,
serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing,etc.) that canbe cut by sharp
edges underneath thetowed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in theT-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
I
I
Attach T-hook chains on
both sides inthe slotted
holes in thebottom of
the cradle,behind the
front wheels.
Position a4” x 4” wood beam across sling chains
contacting the bottom of the radiator support. Position
the lower sling crossbardirectly under the front bumper.
Rear Towing
Tow Limits -- 55 mph (88 kmlh), 500 miles (800 km)
Attach T-hook chains to
slots in the bottom of the
floor pan directly ahead
of the rear wheels on
both sides.
L
Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end
of each control arm.
5-10
No 4 ” x 4 ” wood beam is needed.
Position the lower sling crossbardirectly behind and at
the lower edge of the rearbumper cover.
Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end
of each lower control arm.
5ll
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant light orthe warning light about a
hot engine onyour Buick’s instrument panel. If you
have the optional gage cluster, you may also have a
coolant temperature warning gage. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light” or“Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
I
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you
badly, evenif you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engineif you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil
there is no signof steam or coolant before
opening the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine
if
it overheats, andget out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be
covered by your warranty.
5-12
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see orhear no
steam, theproblem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for aminute or so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Justto be safe, driveslower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pullover, stop and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or threeminutes while you’re parked, to see
if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRTVE (03)
or THIRD (3).
5-13
C
-ACAUTION:
I
.
.
.
I
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could loseall coolant. That could
cause an engind fire, and you could beburned.
Get any leak fixed beforeyou drive the vehicle.
The coolant levelshould be at orabove the R k L
COLD mark. If it isn’t,you may have a leak
in the
or
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump
somewhere e1se.h the coolingsystem.
1 NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to
see if the electric enginefans are running. If the engine
is overheating, both fans should be running.If they
aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Cool:
Recovery Tank
NOTICE:
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean water(preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL
(orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant
recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for
more information.)
TM
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain water or the wrong
mix, your engine could
get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and
you or
others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL antifreeze.
TM
5-16
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.
You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
Steam and scalding liquids from
a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, andif you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can comeout
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
--
a t high speed. Never turn the capwhen the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and
radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
$T:$:-y<
.,< c
,. ?# ’,? ;.‘m+F,:
. . .-.:.
bl
‘‘-J~‘-’=?-jF@py~
,
1. You can remove the radiator pressure capwhen the
cooling system, including the radiator pressurecap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
’
,
’
,
“I.‘.a,,&?
If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-18
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove thepressure cap.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base
of the fillerneck.
4. Then fill the coolant recoverytank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure capoff.
-
5-19
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fans.
7 . By this time the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mix through the filler neck until
the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
5-20
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck,reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusual for a tireto “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire,it’s much more likely to leak outslowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,”here are a few
tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat,avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to
a stopwell out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularlyon a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correctionyou’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible.
If a tiregoes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tiresafely.
I
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle
can slipoff the jack androll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire.To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK
(P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and of
rear
the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tireon the other sideof the
vehicle, at theopposite end.
5-21
Removil
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
re Tire and '1;
The equipment you’ll need
is in the trunk. Pull the
carpeting from the floor of
the trunk. Turn the center
retainer bolt on the spare
tire cover counterclockwise
to remove it.
Lift and remove the cover. See “Compact Spare Tire”
later in this section formore information aboutthe
compact spare.
The box that stores the jack
and wrench is on the
passenger’s side trunk wall.
Open the box and then twist
the wing bolt a quarterturn
counterclockwise.
Remove the jack and wheel wrench.
Remove the spare tire from the trunk.
5-23
Removing wheel clovers and Wheel
Nut Caps
:
."
The tools you'll be using include the jack(A) and wheel
wrench (B).
If your vehicle has an aluminum wheel with a center
cover, remove it by using the flat end of the wheel
wrench to access the wheel nuts.
5-24
If your vehicle has awheel
cover, remove it byusing
the flat endof the
wheel wrench.
Pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off.
Be careful, the rim edges may be sharp. Don’t try to
remove it with your bare hands.
Note: When replacing any wheel cover, carefully line up
the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover.
If your vehicle has this
aluminum wheel, you may
have plastic wheel nut caps.
Use the wheel nut wrench
to remove the wheel nut
caps and to loosen the
wheel nuts.
When reinstalling the decorativenut caps, tighten the
caps snuglywith the wheel wrench, then continue
one-eighth rotation for steel capsand one-quarter
rotation for plastic caps.
If your vehicle has wire
wheel covers, remove them
as follows:
Use the wire wheel key
wrench to remove the
wheel cover.
Using the flat end of the key
wrench handle, between the
wire wheel cover and the
center cap, pry off the
center cap.
Remove the theft-deterrent
nut, by placing the key end
of the wire wheel key
wrench over the nut and
turning it to the left.
Pull off the wire
wheel cover.
Note: When replacing the wheel cover, carefully line up
the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover.
Removing the Flat Tireand Installing the
Spare Tire
2. Attach thewheel wrench to the bolt on the end of the
jack and rotate thewrench clockwise to raise the jack
head a few inches.
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen thewheel nuts, but
don't remove them.
3. Near each wheel well is a notch in the frame to put
the jackhead into. The front notch is 10 inches
(25 cm) back from the front wheel well. The rear
notch is 8 inches (25 cm) forward from the rear
wheel well.
5-27
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked upis
dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
NOTICE:
4. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly on the ridge in the vehicle’s frame nearest the
flat tire. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact
spare tire near you.
Raising yourvehicle with the jack improperly
positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow
the vehicle to fall off the jack.Be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper
location before
raising your vehicle.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from thewheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
5. Raise the vehicleby rotating the wheel wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the jack far enough so
there’s enough room for the spare tire to fit.
6 . Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-29
~
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the
wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become loose after a time. Thewheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
the
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel
a scraper or wire
to do this; but be sure to use
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or
dirt off.
Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts.
If you
do, the nuts might come
loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-30
Place the spare on the
wheel mounting,surface
and replace thewheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel.
. I
Make sure each wheel stud is centered in each wheel
hole while tightening the nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a criss-cross
sequence.
9. Lower the vehicleby rotating the wheel wrench
counterclockwise on the jack. Lower the jack
completely.
5-3
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to getnew GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened witha torque wrench to
100 Ib-ft (140 N-m).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Storethe wheel cover in the trunk until
you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If you try to puta wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the coveror the spare.
5-32
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
A CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve put the compact spare tireon your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the
following procedure to securethe flat tire in the trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their box in the trunk
on the passenger’s side.
5-33
storing the Spare Tiregqd - 4 s
5
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. Ina sudden stop orcollision, loose
equipment couldstrike someone. .Storeall these
in the proper place.
3
4
1
2
The compact spare is fortemporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in thissection. See
the storing instructions label to
replace your compact
spare intoyour trunk properly.
1. Jack
2. Wheel Wrench
4. Tire
5. Cover
3. Wing Bolt
6. Bolt
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check
the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 P a ) .
After installing thecompact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tireis correctly inflated.The compact spare
is made to perform well at posted speed limits for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or
replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace
your spare with a full-size tireas soon as you can. Your
spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you
need it again.
spare.
NOTICE:
1
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel,
and maybeotherparts
of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
I NOTICE:
1
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using
them can damageyour vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast. Themethod known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck,_but
yc must usecaution.
6h,CAUTION:
If you let your tires spina t high speed, they can
explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And,
the transaxleor other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could causea n engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little aspossible. Don’t
spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-36
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy partsof your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels
too fastwhile shifting your transaxle backand
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking your vehicle to get it out:
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn the system off. (See
“Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle’’ inthe Index.
Section 6 Service and AppearanceCare
Here you will find information about the care of
your Buick. This section begins with service and fuel
information, and then it shows how to check important
fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical
information about your vehicle, and a part devoted
to its appearance care.
Service
Your Buick dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your
dealer forall your service needs.You’ll get genuine GM
parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Delco
6-1
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to getthe proper Buick Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your Buick than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Buick” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
I
A CAUTION:
You can be injured and yourvehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work
on a
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, and the proper replacement
parts andtools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can beeasily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specificationshave been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicleperformance
and engine protection. Gasolinesmeeting the AAMA
specification could provideimproved driveability and
emission controlsystem protection compared to
other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noisewhen
you’re accelerating or drivingup a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t haveto buy a higher octanefuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels arenot available in states
adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lampon
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs,return to your
authorized Buick dealer for diagnosis to determine
the
cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition isthe type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane enhancing
additive called MMT. If such fuels are used, your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument
panel may also turn on. If this occurs, returnto your
authorized Buick dealer forservice.
6-3
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now required to
contain additives that will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your
emission control system to function properly. Therefore,
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.In
addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in -yourarea to help clean the air. General
Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
I NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system andalso damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
6-4
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States orCanada, the proper fuelmay be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuelnot
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation,
North American Export Sales (NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
Fillir
Your Tal
A CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highlyflammable. It burns
violently, and thatcan cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away fromgasoline.
The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s side of
your vehicle.
6-5
If you get gasoline on yourself
and then
something ignitesit, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on
you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap
slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the capall the way.
Decause you have the (L36) 3800 V6 engine, your fuel
cap will be tethered and you cannot hang it on the inside
fuel doorwhile refueling.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
6-6
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Buick” in the Index.
When you put the capback on, turn it to the right until
you hear at least three clicks. Make sure you fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. Thiswould
allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See
“Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Checking Things Underthe Hood
A CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start
u
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for
you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
Things that burn can get
on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You or others
could be burned.Be careful not to drop or
spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-7
Hood Relea!
To open the hood, first pull
the hood release handle
inside the vehicle. It is next
to the parking brake pedal
near thefloor.
Then go to the frontof the
vehicle and pull up on the
secondary hood release.
The hood latch is under the
hood, near the center, and at
the frontedge of the grille.
Lift up on the lever as you
lift up on the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then just pull the hooddown and close it firmly.
3800 2
8s II Engine (L36
-
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Battery
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
G. Brake Master Cylinder
H. Air Cleaner
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-9
. ..
Engine Oil
CHECK
OIL LEVEL
For more information, see "Check Oil Level Light" in
the Index. You should check your engine oil level
.regularly; this is anadded reminder.
It's a good idea to checkyour engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
.oilmust
be warm and the vehicle must be on levelground..
6-10
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Oil
Pull out the dipstickand clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll needto
add some oil. But you must usethe right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity,
see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
I NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso
much oil that theoil level gets above the
cross-hatched area thatshows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
The engineoil fill cap is behind the engine oildipstick
and engine fans.
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the
proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-11
What Kind of Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking forthe “Starburst” symbol. Thissymbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not c m y this Starburst symbol.
~~
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BGl FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SA€ VISCOSITY GRADE 011 FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
easoline eneines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
LOOK
. naena aur
FOR MIS :
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
1
J
L _ i
SAE SW-30
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY
OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-12
As shown in the chart, SAE low-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going
to be colder than 60°F ( 16”C) before your next oil
change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE
5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Donot use other viscosity oils,
such as SAE 20W-50.
I NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline
Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench’ oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your Buick dealer is
ready to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly importantwhen outside
temperatures arebelow freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
0
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or othercommercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engineoil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first. (See“Change Oil Indicator’’ in the Index.)
If none of them is true, change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first.Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engineoil to
break down slower.
(See “Change Oil Indicator’’ in the Index.)
6-13
W hi
to Do with
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Air Cleaner
The air cleaner and filter are on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
1. Remove the screws on the air cleaner housing cover.
c
2. Unscrew the clamp on the air intake hosewhere the
hose attachesto the throttlebody near the topof the
from the throttlebody, then
engine. Detach the hose
pull back the entire rear portion
of the air cleaner by
pulling upward and rearward.
3. Replace the air filter.
4. Reinstall the rear sectionof the air cleaner.
5. Reattach the air intake hose and tighten the clamp.
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determinewhen to
replace the airfilter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
6-15
I A CAUTION:L
Operating the engine with the air cleaner
off
can causeyou or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air,it stops flames if
the engine backfires.If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with theair cleaner off.
NOTICE:
I
I
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oilis changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can causea
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
into yourengine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
6-16
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at your Buick dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, besure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid candamage your
transaxle. Too much can mean thatsome of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature,which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may
have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
a Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
a With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
a With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range,pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
a Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
6-17
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
1. The transaxle fluid
dipstick top is a
round loop and
is next to the
brake master
cylinder behind
the engine block.
Pull out the
dipstick and wipe
it with a clean rag
or paper towel.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be inthe cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid touse. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new
DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) engine
coolant. This coolantis designed to remain in your
vehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km),
whichever occurs first.
If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick holeto bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generallyless than a pint
(0.5 L). Don’t overfill. We recommend you use only
fluid labeled DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that
label is made especially foryour automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid otherthan DEXRON-I11 is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
TM
The following explainsyour cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see“Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and the proper coolant for
your Buick will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
@
Give boiling protection up to 265 “ F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
@
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant it
is important that you use
DEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free)
coolant meeting GM Specification 6277M.
If silicated coolant is added to thesystem,
premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion may result.In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first.
--
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain water or the wrong
mix, your enginecould
get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and
you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze.
TM
What toUse
Use a mixture of one-half clean wuter (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze that meets GM Specification
6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use
GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer) (GM Part
No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change. If you
use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
TM
‘NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn’t be covered by
your
warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four
times a year,
have your dealer checkyour cooling system.
I NOTICE:
r
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t haveto
add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto
improve the system. These can be harmful.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level
should be
at FULL COLD or a little higher. When your engine
is wan-& the levelshould be up to FULL HOT ora
little higher.
6-21
COOLANT
LOW
Turning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost
never have to add coolant
at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator are
hot.
--
--
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the
coolant recovery tank.
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not
to spill it.
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don't spill coolant ona hot engine.
6-22
Radiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on theradiator
filler neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure cap, an AC?
cap is recommended.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperatureis controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolantsystem. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches apreset temperature.
6-23
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering
fluid unless you suspect there isa leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid ioss in this system
could indicate aproblem. Have thesystem inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
The power steering fluid reservojris lbcated below the
alternator and behind the accessory drive belt on the
driver’s sidetoward the rearof the engine.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
How .ToCheck Power Steering Fluid
When the enginecompartment is cool,unscrew the cap
and wipe the dipstick with a cleanrag. Replace the cap
and completely tighten it. Then remove the capagain
and look at the fluid levelon the dipstick.
The levelshould be at the FULLCOLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
WhattoUse
I
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule todetermine what
kind of fluid touse. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid.
Failure to use the proper fluid cancause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
6-24
Open the caplabeled WASHER FLUID OmY. Add
washer fluid untilthe tank is full.
NOTICE:
0
0
0
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system.Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tankonly
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansion, which could damage
the tank if it is completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer.It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here.It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The otherreason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
6-25
your brake system fixed, since aleak means that sooner
or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work
at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct aleak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
I
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. A chime will sound if you
try to drive with this warning light on. See“Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
6-26
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme l l @(GM Part
No. 1052535).Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only, and always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap before removing it.
’ A CAUTION:
With the wrong kind
of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work
well, or they
may not even work a t all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.
I
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, justa few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish canbe
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your Buick has front discbrakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and
go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except
when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
The brake wear warning sound means that
sooner or later your brakes
won’t work well.
That could lead to an accident. When
you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
6-27
I
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions orclimates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This doesnot mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wearindicators, but
if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brakedrums
should be removed and inspectedeach time the tiresare
removed for rotation or changing. When you have the
front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected,too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
6-28
Brake Adjustment
I
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake
parts in them, as your Buick does when it is new. When
you replace parts of your braking system -- for example,
when your brake linings wear down and you have to
have new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuine
GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts
in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the
balance between your front and rear brakes can
change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
BuIb Replacement
Every new Buick has a Delco Freedom’ battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one thathas the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
The following proceduretells you how to replace your
headlamp bulbs.
Halogen Bulbs
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from running down.
IA
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or
others couldbe injured. Take special care when
handling and disposingof halogen bulbs.
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas
that can explode.You can be badlyhurt if you
aren’t careful. See“Jump Starting’’ in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepareyour vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-29
1.' Remove the retainers.,by turning in a
counterclockwise direction. (Each headlamp is
attached by retainers with round plastic knobs.)
2. Lift theheadlamp away from the car.
6-30
6 . To install, attachthe
wire connector (A) to
the plastic base making
sure the lack tab (B) is
over the lock (C).
illamps
For bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs” the
in Index.
7. Install the bulb by
putting the small tab (D)
into the smallnotch in
the lamp (E).
8. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn clockwise to
lock it into place.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly into the
headlamp mounting panel make sure the tab is
properly engaged in the panel slot.
11. Open the trunk.Pull the carpetaway from the rear
area to access the trunk taillamp bulbs.
6-31
.
,
.
2. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise, while pressing it firmly.
Trunk Mounted Taillamps
For bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
3. Pull thebulb socket straight outof the assembly.
4. While holding the bulb socket in one hand,turn the
bulb one-quarter turn counterclockwise, while
.
pressing it firmly.
I
5. Pull the bulb straight outof the socket.
1
E
6. Replace with a new bulb by turning it one-quarter
turn clockwise, while pressing it firmly.
7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn clockwise to
lock it intoplace.
I
:d .
‘ I . .i
1. Pull thebulb assembly straight out of the socket.
2. Pull the bulbstraight out of the assembly.
3. Replace the bulb and reassemble.
6-32
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the
type with a release clip:
1. Pull the windshield wiper
arm away from the windshield.
2. Push down on the release clip with a screwdriver and
pull the blade assembly off the wiper arm.
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm.
For the correctwindshield wiper blade replacement
length and type, see“Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts” in the Index.
I
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new Buick comes with
high-quality tires madeby a leading tiremanufacturer.
If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your Buick Warranty
booklet for details.
I
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating asa result of too much friction.
You could havean air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-34
I
CAUTION: (Continued)
0
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to’maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure shouldbe checked
when your tires are
cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken
by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tiresat the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your
tread is badly worn, orif your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
‘
-9
0
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tie-LoadingInformation label, which is on the
rear edge of the driver’s door, showsthe correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold”means
your vehicle has been sitting for atleast three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tellyou that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation),you can
get thefollowing:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the,following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once amonth or more.
Don’t forget your compact sparetire. It should be at
60 psi(420 P a ) .
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-35
Tire Inspection and Rotation
.
Tires should be inspected every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km)for any signs of unusual wear.
If unusual wear is present, rotateyour tires as soon as
possible and check wheel alignment. Also check foi
damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New
Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in thissection
for more information.
The purpose of regular rotationis to achieve more
uniform wear for all tireson the vehicle. The first
rotation is themost important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index forscheduled
rotation intervals.
6-36
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare
tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust thefront and
rear inflation pressuresas shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that
all wheel nuts are
properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque”in the Index.
a wheel, or on the parts to which
Rust or dirt on
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places wherewheel
the
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to usea scraper or wire brush later,
if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt
off. (See
(‘Changing a Flat Tire” in theIndex.)
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a TirePerformance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get oneswith that same TPC Specnumber. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to giveproper endurance, handling,speed rating,
traction, rideand other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replaceyour tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
A CAUTION:
Mixing tires couldcause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of differentsizes or types
(radial and bias-beltedtires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes
may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use thesame
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all rightto drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developedfor use on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The foIlowing information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewallsof most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stopon wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditionson
specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning)traction.
Temperature
-- A, B,C
The temperature grades areA (the highest),B, and C,
representing thetire’s resistance tothe generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under
controlled conditionson a specified indoorlaboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance
which all passenger cartires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is
established fora tire that is properly inflatedand not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to giveyou the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels
aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling oneway or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted
or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
Buick dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one itreplaces.
6-39
1
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replacethem only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
Buick model.
1
Used Replacement Wheels
I
A CAUTION:
6-40
The Chains
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to cleanyour vehicle:
NOTICE:
Gasoline
Use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that arethe proper size for your tires. Install
them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow downuntil it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flamesif you strike a
match or get themon a hot partof the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in closed
a
space.
When you use anything from a container to clean
your
Buick, be sure tofollow the manufacturer’s warnings
0
Benzene
0
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
0
PaintThinner
0
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all behazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can alldamage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, thesewill damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
Reducing Agents
6-41
,
.~
Cleaning the Inside of Your Buick
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean,damp cloth.
Your Buick dealer has two GM cleaners, asolvent-type
spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use
them on vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
0
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
0
If a ringforms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or itwill set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following
the directions on the container label.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
5. Don’t saturate the material.
6. Don’t rub it roughly.
7. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
9. Wipe oft‘ what’s left with a slightly damp paper
towel or cloth.
10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
11. Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaneron Fabric
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleanerat all.
Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
If you need to use a solvent:
0
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or
scraper. Use very little cleaner,
light pressure and clean cloths (preferably
cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of
the stain, “feathering”toward the center. Keep
changing to a cleansection of the cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Special Cleaning Problems
3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if
left on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed
as soon as possible.. Be careful, becausethe cleaner
will dissolve them and may cause them to spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
1, Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterbaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Greasy or Oily Stains
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffeewith cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
Carefully scrape off excess stain, thenclean with
cool water and allow to dry.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
0
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
6-43
Cleaning Vinyl
Care of Safety Belts
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Rub-with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do itmore than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a cleancloth and
a GM VinylKeather Cleaner orequivalent product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap.
For stubborn stains, use a GM Vinylbeather Cleaner
or equivalent product.
Never use oils, varnishes,solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled leathershould be cleaned immediately. If dirt is
allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
6-44
-I
Do not bleachor dye safety belts.If you do, it
may severely weaken them.In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only withmild soap and
lukewarm water.
Glass
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear afterusing the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax
or othermaterial may be on the blade orwindshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011).
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you
rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth
soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent.
Then rinse the blade with water.
Wiper blades should be checked on a regularbasis and
replaced when worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone greasewith a clean cloth atleast every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Buick
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps orchemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, orthey could stain.Dry the finish with a
soft, cleanchamois or a 100% cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure carwashes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
6-45
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Buick by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your Buick has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirlmarks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking
new by keeping your Buick garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damagethe
paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal
repair or replacement,make sure thebody repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts
repaired or
replaced to restore corrosionprotection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches canbe repaired with touch-up
materials available fromyour dealer or other service
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control
can collecton the underbody. If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occuron the underbody
parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutantscan fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan
take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and
small irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,Buick
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-47
.'
Appearance Care Materials Chart
NUMBER
PART
I
Chamois
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish
Vinyl and Leather Cleaner
Glass
Cleaner
Cleans
Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner
Spot Lifter
1050174
16
1050201
1050214
1
1050427
I
23 oz. (0.680 L)
~~
I
I
DESCRIPTION
sq. ft.
02. (0.473 L)
16 02. (0.473 L)
02. (0.473
L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
3 2 oz. (0.946 L)
1050004
2.75
1050172
16
1050173
~
SIZE
I
I
~~
USAGE
Shines vehicle without scratching
Also removes old waxes and polishes
Removes rust and corrosion
Removes soil and black marks
Exterior cleaner and polish
Spot and stain removal
grease, grime smoke
and
film
Cleans vinyl, cloth, tires and mats
For cloth
Windshield washer solvent and antifreeze
Exterior wash
vinyl, leather
and
rubber
Spray
- - on wheel cleaner
Optikleen
WaxandWash
Concentrate
Armor All" Protector
Protects
8 02. (0.237 L)
1052918**
Wheel Cleaner
16 02. (0.473 L) I
1I
1052929
I
1052930
I 8 02. (0.237 L) I Capture Dry
Spot
Remover
I
Attracts
and
absorbs
soils
oz. (0.473 L)
Armor All" Cleaner
Cleans
vinyl, leatherrubber
and
12345002""
16
12345725
12
02. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
Shines tires
* Not recommended for pigskin suede leather.
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
**Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See "Fluids and Lubricants" in theIndex.
I
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.. ,
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label is:
,
your VIN,
the model designation,
f
E N G I N E A G
CODE
MODEL YEAR
ASSEMBLY
PLANT
This is the legal identifier for your Buick. It appears on
a plate in the front cornerof the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. TheVIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
paint information, and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Engine Identification
The eighth characterin your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
6-49
Electrical System
Windshield Wipers
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, be sure to have it fixed.
I NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your Buick
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment
can keep othercomponents from workingas
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your Buick, see“Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Buick” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by an interna1 circlui t
breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to
go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this
happens, have your headlamp system checked
right away.
6-58
Power Windows and Other Power
Accessories
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
MaxifusedRelay Center
To check the fuses in this underhood fuse center, turn
the two knobs one-quarter turn counterclockwise and
loosen the metal wing nut on the passenger side of the
cover. Then remove the cover. The inside of the cover
has a chart that explains the features and controls
governed by each fuse and relay.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Driver’s Side Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse,you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the driver’s
side and passenger’s side fuse blocks.
The driver’s side fuse block is to the left of the steering
wheel, under the instrument panel.
Snap off the cover to reveal the fuses. You’ll find a fuse
puller clipped to the inside of the cover. Place the wide
end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse.
Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out.
Spare fuses are located in the slots labeled “Spare” on
the following chart.
When finished, replace the cover by snapping it back up
into place.
6-51
Fuse
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
1A
2A
3A
4A
SA
6A
7A
SA
9A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
6-52
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Power Seats Circuit Breaker
Not Used
Not Used
PASS-Key
Spare
Not Used
Not Used
Up-Level HVAC, ALM, Cruise Control
Courtesy Lamps, Power Mirrors
Not Used
Perimeter Lighting
Ashtray, Cigarette Lighter
Turn Signal, Back-up Lamps, Cornering
Lamps, LCM
Spare
Not Used
Not Used
Anti-Lock Brake System, Computer
Command Control
Brake and Hazard Lamps
Fuse
7B
8B
9B
IC
2c
3c
4c
5c
6C
7c
8C
9c
ID
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
Usage
Not Used
Interior Lighting
Electronic Level Control
Air Bag System
Spare
Not Used
Not Used
Cooling Fans, Transaxle
Parking Lamps, Interior Lamps
Not Used
Parking Lamps
Radio, Cluster
Telltale, Chime, Cluster
Spare
Not Used
Not Used
Base A/C
Not Used
Not Used
Fuse
8D
9D
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
8E
9E
Usage
Radio
Not Used
Not Used
Air Bag System, PASS-Key
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defog
Not Used
Not Used
Wipers, Washer
Not Used
Passenger’s Side Fuse Block
Additional fusesare located in the relay center, on the
passenger’s side, below the instrument panel.You must
remove the sound insulator on the right side of the
passenger footwellto replace these fuses.
Since replacing these fuses is difficult. We recommend
that you see your dealer if you need one replaced.
6-53
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
RELAY
POSITIONS
o n
on0
7
n o
000
r---------q
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUSE
POSITIONS
I
I
~
I
6-54
&
n
8
U
12
U
nI
l
I
I
I
I
n
~
8
9
10
11
12
Usage
Door Locks
Trunk Release, RAC
Horns
Not Used
Miscellaneous Engine Controls
Fuel Pump
Injectors
Powertrain Control Module
Not Used
Not Used
A/C Programmer
Not Used
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Outside Lamps
Front
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Parkingnurn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057NA
Halogen Headlamps
Low-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9006
9005
High-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sidemarker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194NA
Rear
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1141
License Plate Lamp .......................
194
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 156
Cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 156
SidemarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Tail/Stop/Tum Signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057
Bulb
Inside Lamps
Overhead
Dome Lamps (Custom) ....................
168
Domemeading Lamps (Limited) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Headliner Side Rail Lamps (Limited) . . . . . . A3 173B
VisorVanity Mirror Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7065
Rearview Mirror Map Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212-2
Doors
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 168
PC 168
Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Footwell Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Glove Compartment Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Ashtray Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11-2
Engine
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
561
6-55
Capacities and Specifications
Automatic TransaxleAT (Overdrive)
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 quarts (6.1 L)
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 quarts (10.4 L)
When draining or replacing torque converter, more j h ’ d may be needed.
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 quarts (12.3 L)
Engine Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 quarts (4.3L)
Oil change with filter change
FuelTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8gallons(68L)
Tire Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tire-Loading Information label on driver’s door.
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100 Ib-ft (140 N-m)
Refrigerant (R-l34a), Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . See refrigerant charge label under the hood.
NOTE: All capacities areapproximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, asrecommended
in thismanual.
6-56
Air Conditioning Refrigeran';
Not all air conditioning refrigerants arethe same.
If the air conditioningsystem in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If you're not sure, askyour Buick dealer.
Engine Specifications
3800 Series I1 Engine (L36)
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V6
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8L
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205-hp
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-5-4-3-2
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 195O F (9 1 "C)
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A- 1096C
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF-47
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41 -921
Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
Transaxle Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 8651909
Windshield Wiper Blades
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 inches (565 mm)
Vehicle Dimensions
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 inches (5 080 mm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73.6 inches (1 869.4 mm)
Height.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.7 inches (1 414.8 mm)
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . 110.8 inches (2 814.3 mm)
Tread Width
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.4 inches (1 534.2 mm)
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.2 inches (1 529.1 mm)
L36 Engine Accessory Belt
A. Power Steering
The L36 engine uses an engine accessory belt. This
diagram shows the features connected and the routing.
See “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index for when to
check the belt.
B. Alternator
C. Air Conditioning
D. Idle
E. Crank
E Coolant Pump
A
C
I
Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
-AT
THE PROPER
-LEVEL AND
RECOMMENDED
Your Vehicle and the Environment
I
This section coversthe maintenance required foryour
Buick. Your vehicle needs these services
to retain its
safety, dependability and emission control performance.
Protection
Plan
Proper vehiclemaintenance not only helpsto keep your
vehicle ingood working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even
affect the qualityof the airwe breathe. Improper fluid
levels or thewrong tire inflation can increase
the level
of emissions fromyour vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle ingood
condition, pleasemaintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased theGM Protection Plan?The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet,or your Buick
dealer for details.
7-1
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to have done and how often. Someof these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, havea qualified
technician do the work.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information GM publishes. See “Serviceand Owner
Publications” in the Index.
7-2
“Part B: Owner Checks andServices’’ tells you
what should be checked whenever you stop for fuel.It
also explains what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
(‘Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your Buick dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition,it is a good idea tokeep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
The proper fluids and lubricants to use arelisted in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
These schedules are forvehicles that:
in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
Tire-Loading Information label. See“Loading Your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
Vehicle’’ in the Index.
to do errands or in many other ways.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
Because of all the differentways people use their GM
driving limits.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
Selecting the Right Schedule
section and note how you drive. If you have any
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
condition, see your Buick dealer.
schedule to follow:
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.If you
go toyour dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service peoplewill
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
f
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the ShortTrip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions istrue for your vehicle:
0
1
Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below .freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling(such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer oruse a carrier ontop of
your vehicle.
0
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you
should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under
any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oilbreak
to
down sooner.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10000 km): Chassis Lubrication
(or 6months, whichever occurs fist).
At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Then Every
12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
These intervals only summarize
maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe completemaintenance schedule on
the following pages.
--
Maintenance Schedule
Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true.
Driving a vehicle with u f i l l y warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engineoil to breuk
down slower.
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) -- Then Every
15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessorv
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
Spark Plug Wire Inspection. SparkPlug Replacement.
These it1tervals only sunlmarize maintenance services.
Be sure to.follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
7-5
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
I
* If your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor, the
monitor will show you when to change the oil -- usually
between 3,000 miles (5 000 km)and 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) since your last oil change. Under severe
conditions the indicator may come on before
3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more
than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months (whichever
occurs first) without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dustin the oil. So if you
drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE OIL
light comes on. Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor
when the oil has been changed. For more information,
see “Engine Oil Life Monitor’’ in the Index.
I
ShortTriplCityMaintenanceSchedule
I
3.000 Miles (5 000 km)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
v
ACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED
BY
7-7
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Co17tso1 Service.
An Emission Control Sesvice.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every6 months,
whichever occurs first).
DATE
I
7-a
SERVICED BY:
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
I
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
1
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
1
SERVICED BY:
7-9
-&City
Maintenance Schedule
I
I 24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
I7 Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. *
An Emission Con.tro1Service.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
~~~
DATE
7-10
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
I
,
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
'1
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3.months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whicheveroccurs first). .
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
i
DATE
L
ACTUALMILEAGESERVICED
L
BY:
7-11
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
33,000 Miles (55000 km)
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
*
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
DATE
7-12
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
7-13
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
I
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
42,000 Miles (70000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
in dusty conditions.Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
I
I
DATE
7-14
1
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
*
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
50,000 A4ile.s (83 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions,the fluid and filter donot
require changing.
~
DATE
~
ACTUAL MILEAGE
~~
~
~
~~~~
~~
SERVICED B Y
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
7-15
I
1
Short Trip/City MaintenanceSchedule
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control $erviCe.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
I
7-16
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. *
An Emission Corztrol Service.
*
17 Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every6 months,
whichever occurs first).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
AI? Emission Co??trolService.
(Continued)
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
1
7-17
r S h i t Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
(
I
,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
Replace air cleaner filter.
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
An Emission Control Service.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
*
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Sewice."
DATE
7-18
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
66,000 Miles (I10 000 km)
I
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
Cl Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
Cl Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
~~
7-19
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
72,000 Miles (120 000 kmj)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months; whichever occursfirst).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
*
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in 'dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission ControlService.
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
r
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Enzission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every6 months,
whichever occurs first).
c]Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-21
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
84,000 Miles (140 000 kj
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An En1ission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every6 months,
whichever occurs first).
SERVICED B Y
7-22
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService..
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Replace air cleaner filter.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or ,leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service.f
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B,E
7-23
I
I
Short TriplCity, Maintenance Schedule
93,OOOMiles (155 000 km)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 6 months,
whichever occurs first).
i
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
1
SERVICED BY:
I
I
1
I
1
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I Short l’rip/City Maintenance Schedule I
100,000 Miles (166,000km)
Jl Change engine oiland filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
*
An Emission Control Service.
0Drain, flush and.refil1cooling
system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. ,Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
(Contimed)
7-25
I
TridCity Maintenance Schedule
S
(hotr
l.OO,OOOMiles (166000 km) (Continued)
0Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter
'
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32 C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
v y o u do not use your vehicle underany of
these conditions,the fluidand filter donot
require changing.
I
O
DATE
~
7-26
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals.
Footnotes
3‘ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of this vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
1
* If your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor, the
monitor will show you when to change the oil -- usually
between 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km) and 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) since your last oil change. Under severe
conditions, the indicator may come on before
3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more
than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months (whichever
occurs first) without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure tochange your oil every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE OIL
light comes on. Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor
when the oil has been changed. For more information,
see “Engine Oil Life Monitor’’ in the Index.
7-27
Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
\
DATE
7-28
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
1
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. 7
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-29
I
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule II
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever,occursfirst).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
37,500 Miles (62’500km)
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every12 months,
whichever occurs first).
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every ,112months,
whichever occurs first).
CI Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
I
7-30
*
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
52,500 Miles (87500 km)
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
0Change engine oil and filter (or e:veqJ
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
O
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions,the fluid and filter donot
require changing.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
I
I
DATE
1
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-31
Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. *
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
7-32
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
B o n g Trip/Highwa&aintenance Schedule
L
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oiland filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or eve?r‘
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emissio??Control Service.
*
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in theIndex for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
8
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
-
~~~~
~
~
~~~
I
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. *
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
AI?Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Cl Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuelcap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emissior?Control Service.
DATE
7-34
*
‘t-
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
I
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
*
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
[7 Lubricate the suspension and steering
linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking
brake cable guides and underbody contact
points and linkage (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-35
1
I
Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressuretest the
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. -f
0Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90O F
(32 O C) or higher.
- hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as foundin taxi, police or
delivery service.
. I n
If you do notuse your vehicle under any of
these conditions,the fluid and filter do not
require changing.
DATE
7-36
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluidif
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants areadded to your
vehicle, make surethey are the proper ones, as
shown
in Part D.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel FilI
I t is importantfor you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant LevelCheck
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for further details.
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” in the Index for further details,
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Power Antenna Service
Clean power antenna mast. See“Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
7-37
At Least Twicea Year
At Least Once a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Key Lock CylindersService
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
7-38
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, glove box
door and console door. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
A CAUTION:
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
I A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does,you or others could be
injured. Follow thesteps below.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position,your
vehicle needs service.
I
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof
PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
7-39
L.
-
Steering Column Lock Check
While parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn
the key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK
(P)
Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
To check the parking brake: With the engine running
and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until
the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
Shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others couldbe
injured and property could be damaged.
Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should thevehicle begin to move.
7-40
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and serviceswhic.h should be
performed at least twicea year (for instance, each spring
and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service
department or other qualified servicecenter do these jobs.
Make sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.
Proper procedures toperform these servicesmay be
found in a Buick service manual. See “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front-Wheel-Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspensionand steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs
of
wear, or lackof lubrication. Inspectthe power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.
Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system.Inspect the body
near the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections, or other conditions
which
could cause aheat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust’’ in
the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect the hosesand have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or
binding,
and for damage or missingparts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspectbrake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake
pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition.Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspectother brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers,parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment.You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-41
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
USAGE FLUIDlLUBRICANT
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from your
GM dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50 mixture of water (preferably
distilled) and GM Goodwrench@
DEX-COOL or Havoline@
DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
silicate-free) antifreeze
conforming to GM Specification
6277M. See “Engine Coolant’’ in
the Index.
TM
7-42
I
Coolant
Supplement
Sealer
GM Part No. 3634621 or
equivalent with a complete flush
and refill.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052535 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pt.,
1050017 - 1 qt., or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
DEXRON@-I11Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
@
USAGE
Chassis
Lubrication
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
Hood Latch
Assembly Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release Pawl
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol(GM
Part No. 12346293 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
~
See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended
replacement filters and spark plugs.
7-43
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services areperformed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after themaintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to storethem.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
SERVICED
READING
DATE
7-44
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-45
I
Maintenance Record
I
SERVICED
READING
DATE
I
7-46
ODOMETER
I
I
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
1
Section 8 CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you will find out how to contact Buick if you
need assistance. This section also tells you how to
obtain service publications and how to report any
safety defects.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
This section includes information on:
0
The Customer Satisfaction Procedure
0
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
0
Roadside Assistance
0
Courtesy Transportation
0
BBB Auto Line -- Alternative Dispute
Resolution Proeram
v
0
Reporting Safety Defects
0
Service and Owner Publications
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and Buick. Normally, any concern you may have
8-1
with your vehicle can be handled by your selling or
servicing dealer. Your dealer has the facility, trained
technicians, special tools and up-to-date information to
promptly address any issue which may arise. Buick has
empowered its dealers to make decisions and repair
vehicles, and they are eager to resolveyour concern to
your complete satisfaction. If your concern has not been
resolved toyour satisfaction, take the following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a
member of dealer management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or Parts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe
General Manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contactinga member
of dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact
GM of Canada Customer Assistance Center in
Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
8-2
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
0
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
0
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
0
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-7s 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish)
0
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
0
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
0
In all other Caribbean countries: 1-809-763- 13 15
0
In other overseas locations, call GM North American
Export Sales in Canada at 1-905-644-4 112
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to givethe Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Buick, write to:
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for addresses of Canadian and
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Buick, pleaseremember that your
concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using
the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That
is why we suggest you follow StepOne first if you
have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Buick Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
902 E. Hamilton Avenue
Flint, MI 48550
8-3
,
Roadside Assistance
.
Our commitment to Buickowners has always included
superior service through our network of 3,000 Buick
dealers. Buick Roadside Assistance provides an extra
measure of convenience and security.
n
Buick Roadside Assistance:
- Provides owners with access to minor repairs or
towing for disabled vehicles.
1
..-
r
For details on Buick Roadside Assistance, please consult
your Buick Roadside Assistance owner booklet included
with your owner’s manual. For needed assistance, call
the Buick Roadside Assistance toll-free hotline:
1-800-252-1112.
,. .
Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Roadside
Assistance to customers for vehiclescovered under the
36 month/36,000 mile .(whichever occurs first) new
car warranty.
8-4
- Takes the anxiety out of uncertain situations by
providing easy access to serviceprofessionals trained
to workwith Buick owners, 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year, including weekends and holidays.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or theUnited States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided-by the dealer or.call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
i
I
Courtesy Transportation
To Buick Motor Division, QualityMeans Service -- and
service means “keeping you on the road.”
Included with your 1996 Buick new car warranty
(36 month/36,000 miles, whichever occurs first),is
Courtesy Transportation, aprogram which will provide
Buick retail customers with:
-
Reimbursement toward a loaner vehicle, courtesy of
Buick Motor Division, forup to five days for
vehicles requiring overnight warranty repairs. Also,
reimbursement up to $30 aday (five days maximum)
may be available forthe cost of a rental car, bus or
even a cab.
-
A free one-way shuttle ride up to 10 miles from the
dealership is available forcustomers whose vehicles
require same-day warranty repairs.
Courtesy Transportation is Buick’s way of extending the
Premium Service you’ve come to expect from Buick
and its 3,000 dealers. Pleasereview the Courtesy
Transportation glove box card contained in your vehicle,
or consult your Buick dealer for details.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour
dealer for details.The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
8-5
GM Participation inBBB AUTO
LINE -- Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program*
*This program may not be available in all states,
depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet.
General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in
this program.
Both Buick and your Buick dealer are committed
to making sure you are completelysatisfied with
your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that,
if a situation arises where you feel your concern
has not been adequately addressed, the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this
section is verysuccessful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to adisagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Buick voluntarily participates in BBB
AUTO LINE.
8-6
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle disputes between customers and automobile
manufacturers. This program is available free of charge
to customers who currently own or lease a GMvehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary
between you and Buick. If this mediation is
unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled
where eligible customers may present their case to an
impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitratorwill make a decisionwhich you may
accept or reject.If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claimuntil a decisionis made.
Some statelaws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information, contactthe
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Buick Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-955-7300.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could causeinjury or death,you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U. S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K l G 3J2
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
902 E. Hamilton Avenue
Flint, MI 48550
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-8
Service and Owner Publications
Service Manuals
Service manuals contain diagnosticand repair
information for all chassis and body systems. They
may be useful for owners who wish to get a greater
understanding of their vehicle. They are also useful for
owners with the appropriate skill level or training who
wish to perform “do-it-yourself” service. These are
authentic General Motors service manuals meant for
professional, qualified technicians.
Service manuals, servicebulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for
purchase for all
current and many past model General Motors vehicles.
Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-800-551-4 123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-800-668-5539
8-9
Service Bulletins
Owner Publications
Service bulletins covering various subjects areregularly
sent to all General Motors dealerships. GM monitors
product performance in the field. When service methods
are found which promote better service on GM vehicles,
bulletins are created to helpthe technician perform
better service. Service bulletinsmay involve any
number of vehicles. Some will describe inexpensive
service; others will describe expensive service. Some
will advise of new or unexpected conditions, and others
may help avoid future costly repairs. Service bulletins
are meant for qualified technicians. In some.cases
bulletins refer to service manuals, specialized tools,
equipment and safety procedures necessary to service
the vehicle. Since these bulletins are issued throughout
the model year and beyond, an index is required and
published quarterly to help identify specific bulletins.
Subscriptions are available. You can order an index at
the toll-free numbers listed previously, or ask aGM
dealer to seean index or individual bulletin.
Owner’s manuals, warranty folders and various owner
assistance booklets provide owners with general
operation and maintenance information.
8-10
Section 9 Index
.
A i r Bag ......................................
1-16
How Does it Restrain ........................... 1-20
; . . . . . . . . . 1-18
How it Works ......................
Location .................................... 1-18
1-17, 2-56
Readiness Light .........................
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.19
When Should it Inflate .........................
Aircleaner ....................................
6-14
3-5
Air Conditioning ................................
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.56,6.57
Air Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.3
Alarm. Instant. Keyless Entry ......................
2-8
Alarm. Universal Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 14
6-39
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-46
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ......................
Antenna.HeatedBacklite ........................
3-32
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58.4.6
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Anti.Theft. Radio ..............................
3-27
6-41
Appearancecare ...............................
'
.
Appearance Care Materials .......................
6-48
Arbitration Program ...............................
8-7
2-47
Armrest.Storage ...............................
2-48
Ashtrays ......................................
Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control . . . . . . . 3-29
Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-10
Audio Systems .................................
Automatic
Overdrive ...................................
2-23
7-38
Transaxle Check ..............................
Transaxle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
2-21
Transaxle Operation ...........................
2-21
Shifting .....................................
Transaxle Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Automatic Dimming Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
6-29
B a t t i y ......................................
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Rundown Protection ...........................
2-43
2-56
WarningLight ...............................
5-2
Warnings ....................................
8-6
BBB Auto Line .................................
6-58
Belt. Engine Accessory ..........................
9-1
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Brake
6-28
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-28
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28, 7-39
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Brakes. Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-9
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 17
Break-In. New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
BTSICheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.28.7.39
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
8-4
Canadian Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
2.29.4.27. 4-33
CarbonMonoxide ....................
Cassette Deck Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-37
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12
3-3 1
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Certificationrire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
9-2
Chains.Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
6-41
Chains.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Oil Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Changing a Flat Tire .............................
5-21
2-61
Check Engine Light .............................
2-65
Check Oil Level Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
6-47
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1-33
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
WheretoPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
Cleaner, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning
6-46
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
TnsideofYour Buick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6-45
Outside of Your Buick .........................
6-43
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6-44
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Climate Control. Steering Wheel Touch Control . . . . . . . . 3-9
Climate Control System ........................... 3-1
Clock. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
2-47
Coinholder ....................................
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-31
Compact Disc Care .............................
37 18
Compact Disc Player ............................
Compact Disc Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20. 3-25
5-35
Compact Spare Tire ..............................
Console Storage .................................
2-47
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
4-5
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2-46
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
6-19
Coolant .......................................
Heater.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
RecoveryTank ...............................
5-16
5-14
Cooling System ................................
2-41
CourtesyLamps ................................
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
2-35
Cruise Control .................................
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 8- 1
Damage. Finish ................................ 6-47
6-47
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................
2-38
Daytime Running Lamps .........................
DeadBattery ...................................
5-2
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
4-1
Defensive Driving ...............................
;
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Defogger.
Rear
Window
__
3-8
.....................................
Defogging
3-8
Defrosting .....................................
Dimenions.Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
B Noise
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.17
. . . . 3.14.
Dolby 8Reduction
2-3
DoorLocks .....................................
1-9
Driver Position ..................................
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4-2
Drunken .....................................
4-20
Freeway ....................................
In a Blizzard .................................
4-26
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-4
4-16
IntheRain ..................................
Night ......................................
4-15
4-10
On Curves ..................................
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
On Snow and Ice .............................
4-25
Through Water ...............................
4-18
WetRoads ..................................
4-16
4-24
Winter ......................................
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Dual Automatic ComforTemp Climate Control . . . . . . . . . 3-3
.
9-3
I
i
Electrical Equipment. Adding‘ ..... ......... 3.30.6.50
Entry Lighting. Delayed ..........................2-41
Electrical System ...............................
6-50
Ethanol ........................................
6-4
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror .......... 2-44
2-29
Exhaust. Engine .................................
4-29
Electronic Level Control .........................
Exit Lighting. Delayed ........................... 2-41
Electronic Touch Climate Control ................... 3- 1
Express-Down Window .......................... 2-31
.
Engine ........................................ 6-9
Accessory Belt ............................... 6-58
Coolant .....................................
6-19F i b r i c Cleaning ...........................: ... 6-42
Fan Control. Climate Control System ............ 3.2.3.3
Coolant Heater ............................... 2-20
Filling
Your Tank ................................
6-5
Coolant Level Check ......................, .... 7-37
..................................... 6-14
Coolant Temperature GageAir ..................... 2-60
Filter.
2-60
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ..............
Oil ........................,. ...... 6-13
Engine
Filter.
Finishcare ....................................6-46
Exhaust .....................................
2-29
Finish Damage .................................
6-47
Fuse Block (Driver’sSide) .......................6-51
...................
2-23
First
.Gear.
Automatic
Transaxle
Fuse Block (Passenger’s Side) ................... 6-53
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
5-1
Identification .................................
6-49
Flash-to-Pass Feature ...........................
2-33
Oil Level Check ...............................7-37
Overheating .................................. 5-12
Flat Tire, Changing ............................. 5-21 .
7-42
Fluids and Lubricants ............................
2-29
Running While Parked ..........................
6-4
Foreign Countries, Fuel ...........................
Specifications ................................ 6-57
..
Language
French
Manual ............................11
Starting Your ................................
18
2Front Towing ....................................5-9
Engine Oil .....................................
6-10
Adding :.................................... 6-11
Fuel ..........................................
6-3
Canada ......................................
6-3
6-13
Additives ...................................
Filling Your Tank ................................
6-5
6-1 1
Checking . . . . : ..............................
Pressure Gage .................................2-64
........................................
2-67
Gage
PressureLight . .............................
2-64
In Foreign Coun@es ..................1 ......... 6-4
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Used ....................................... 6-14
Whentochange .............................. 6-13
.
9-4 .
’
..
en
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-60
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Fuel .......................................
2-67
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Gear7-41
Positions, Automatic TransaxleSystem
Glove Box ....................................
2-47
Gfoss Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-28
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
Guide FranGais ..................................
11
..
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Halogen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
2-50 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Panel
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
HeadRestraints ................................. l-3
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Bulb Replacement .............................6-29
2-33
High/Low Beamchanger ......................
OnReminder ................................
2-38
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Ignition Positions ..............................
2-17
Illuminated Entry ...............................
2-41
6-35
Inflation. Tire ..................................
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Inspections .................................... 7-41
Brake
................................
ExhaustSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Radiator and'Heater Hose ......................
7-41
Steering ....................................
7-41
Suspension ..................................
7-41
Throttle Linkage ..............................
7-41
Instrument
...............................
2-40
Brightness Control ............................
.
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
2-52,2-53
Cluster ................................
InteriorLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Jack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Jump Starting ....................................
5-2
7-38
K e y Lock Cylinders Service .....................
Key Reminder Warning
..................... 2 13.
- 12. 8
Keyless Entry System .............................
InstantAl................................. 2-7
2-8
Personal Choice ................................ 2-8
Keys ..........................................
2-1
9-5
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Certificationnire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
4-28
Tire-LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2-41
Entry Lighting. Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Lighting. Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
2-40
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perimeter Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 1
TheaterDimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-27
Light Sensor. Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Lights
1- 17. 2-56
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58. 4.6
Battery Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-57
ChangeOilSoon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2-61
CheckEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CheckOilLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2-61
Low Coolant Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LowFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
OilPressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-64
Safety Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4. 2-55
9-6
Traction Control System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59.4.8
Traction Off Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
7-38
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
2-6
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2-4
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Steering Column Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
2-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
2-61
Low Coolant Warning Light ......................
LowFuelLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
7-42
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Lubrication Service, Body ........................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. 10
Magnasteer
MaintenanceRecord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-44
7-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LongTrip/HighwayDefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-5
Long Tripmighway Intervals .....................
7-37
Owner Checks and Services .....................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Short Trip/City Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Short Trip/CityIntervals ........................
7-4
. . .
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
6-47
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ....................... 2-61
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Manual Remote Control Mirror .......... ......... 2-45
MaxifuseBelay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
2-4
Memory Door Locks .............................
Methanol .......................................
6-4
2-43
Mirrors .......................................
2-46
Automatic D-ing
Outside ....................
2-46
Convex Outside ..............................
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Inside Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2-45
Manual Remote Control ........................
2-46
Power Remote Control . . . .-.....................
2-49
Visorvanity ..................................
6-3
MMT .........................................
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
.
2-48
N e t , Convenience ..............................
2-22
Neutral, Automatic Transaxle .....................
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Odometer ......................................2-54
Odometer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Off-RoadRecovery .............................
4-12
6-10
Oil, Engine ....................................
Oil Level Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Oil Pressure Light ..............................
2-64
Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
5-12 .
Overheating Engine .............................
Owner Checks’and Services .......................
7-37
8 - 9 1
Owner Publications. Ordering ......................
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
6-47
Park
2-21
Automatic Trimaxle ..........................
Shifting Into .................................
2-25
2-28
Shifting Out of ...............................
Parking
AtNight .....................................
2-13
2-24
Brake ......................................
7-40
Brake Mechanism Check .......................
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . 2-28
3-9
Passenger Temperature Control .....................
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.
PASS-Key II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Perimeter Lighting ..............................
2-.41
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Power
7-37
Antennaservice ..............................
DoorLocks ....................................
2-4
OptionFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Seat ......................................... l-2
Steering .....................................
4-10
Steering Fluid .................................
6-23
2-30
Windows ...................................
9-7
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ....................
1-22
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 .18
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.3.12.3.15.3.18. 3.22
Rain. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 16
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42.2.43
Rear
Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
1-24
Outside Seat Position ..........................
Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-24
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
WindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2-44
Electrochromic Daymight ......................
Inside Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 16
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.56. 6-57
Remote
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Keyless Entry System. Instant Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Keyless Entry System. Personal Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- I 1
Trunk Release Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
9-8
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
8-7
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraints
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1-32
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Systemcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Reverse, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
1-22
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
8-4
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
6-36
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-9
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
1-30
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
1-12, 1-41, 1-42
Incorrect Usage ....................
LapBelt ..................................
:.1-23
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9.1.25
1-40
LargerChildren ...............................
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Reminder Light .......................... 1-4, 2-55
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ................... 1- 11
Smaller Children and Babies....................
1-30
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-5
WhyTheyWork ...............................
4-33
Safety Chains ..................................
Safety Defects, Reporting ......................... 8-7
...
vm
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................
7-3
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
1-2
Seatback, Reclining Front .........................
Seats
ManualFront .................................
1-1
Power ....................................... 1-2
1-1
Restraint Systems ..............................
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1
Securing a Child Restraint ......................
1-34
Second Gear, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-15
Security System ................................
.
Service .........................................
6- 1
Bulletins. Ordering .............................
8-9
Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
8-9
Publications. Ordering ...........................
6-2
Work. Doing Your Own .........................
6-1
Service and Appearance Care ......................
8-9
Service and Owner Publications ....................
Service Publications ..............................
8-9
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Buick . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
SheetMetalDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Shifting
2-21
AutomaticTransaxle ..........................
2-25
ZntoPark(P) .................................
OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2-32
Signaling Turns ................................
4-14
Skidding ......................................
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
5-35
Spare Tire. Compact .............................
6-56
Specifications and Capacities ......................
Specifications. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance ............... 8-3
Speedometer ...................................
2-54
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Stains. Cleaning ................................
6-43
Starter Switch Check ............................ 7-39
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
4-10
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ColumnLockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 1
Magnasteer mr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 0
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
3-9. 3-29
Wheel Touch Control ......................
2-31
Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Storage. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Supplemental Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 16
Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 I
Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 I
Temperature Control. Climate Control System . . . . . 3.2. 3-3
3-9
TemperatureControl.Passenger ....................
2-41
TheaterDimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2- 14
Theft-Deterrent Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
THEFTLOCK" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
6-23
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10
Third Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2-40
Time Out Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
4-28
TireLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-39
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
6-41
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
6-47
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Inflation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-38
6-37
Wear Indicators ..............................
6-39
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When It's Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32, 6-56
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Traction
4-8
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59. 4-8
4-8
Off Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
4-33
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
4-33
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
4-35
Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaxle Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 16
Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
8-5
Transportation, Courtesy ..........................
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Trunk
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Release Lockout, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-1 1
Release, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 12
8-3
TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2-33
Turn Signal On Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
2-39
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-40
Underbody Flushing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
Universal Theft-Deterrent System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle
4-5
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DamageWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
6-57
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
4-28
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
VisorVanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Visors, Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-57
Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Washer Fluid. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-45
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-11
Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.32.6.56
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
WindowLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Express-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 1
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
9-12
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-37
2-34
WindshieldWiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6-50
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Wiring,Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
5-7
WreckerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
I
">